
Class. 
Book„ 
Copyiiglit]^^ 



M£ 



CCEffilGIIT 



TELEPATHY 

AND THE SUBLIMINAL SELF 

An account of recent investigations regarding 
Hypnotism^ Automatism, Dreams, Phan- 
tasms, and Related Phenomena, 

BY 

R. OSGOOD MASON, A. M., M. D. 

Fellow of the New York Academy of Medicine 

4th Impression. 343 pp. i2mo. $1.50 

A book accurate enough for scientists and 
simple enough for lovers of "ghost stories," 
On a thread of theory and discussion Dr. 
Mason links many startling examples from 
his own professional experience and from The 
Proceedings of the Society for Psychical Re- 
search. With a copy of a portrait made while 
in a trance by a person who had never painted 
before. 

Boston Transcript: " He repudiates the idea 
of the supernatural altogether, and in this he 
is in accord with the best thought of the day. 
. . . Interesting and logical." 

Hartford Courant: "The work of a scientist 
and not of a crank. . . Fascinating reading." 

New York Times: "The curious matter he 
treats about, he presents in an interesting 
manner." 

Outlook: "Will have many readers. . . A 
not inconsiderable contribution to psychical 
research." 

Nation: " A popularlj?^ written book. . . The 
cases cited are trustworthy, and the book is 
good as far as it goes." 

Chicago Tribune: " Certain to attract wide 
attention. . . Thoroughly interesting. . . The 
spirit of his work is such as to deserve respect- 
ful attention from every scientific mind." 



HENRY HOLT & CO. - - NEW YORK 



I 

HYPNOTISM 



SUGGESTION 



AND ^ -«- <^ 



IN THERAPEUTICS, EDUCATION, and REFORM 



BY 

R. OSGOOD MASON, A. M., M. D. 

Fellow of the New York Academy of Medicine afid author of 
''Telepathy and the Subliminal Self 




NEW YORK 

HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY 
1901 



THE LIBRARY OF 

CONGRESS, 
Two Copies Received 

MAR. 8 1901 

OPYRIGHT ENTRY 

CLASS «.XXc. N«. 



Copy 



2-77? 

COPY B. 






<^ 



\\ 



% 




Copyright, igoi, 

BY 
HENRY HOLT & CO. 



THE MERSHON COMPANY PRESS, 
RAHWAY, N. J. 



PREFACE. 

The volume here presented does not assume to 
be a systematic treatise upon hypnotism, nor even 
upon its therapeutic uses; for that the works of 
Bernheim, Moll, Wetterstrand, Tuckey, and 
others may suffice — ^but there are certain phases of 
hypnotism which seem to the author to be of 
special interest and present importance, and it is 
for the purpose of distinctly presenting these 
special phases inat the following chapters have 
been prepared. 

Hypnotism to the medical orofession has not 
been a specially welcome guest, either in England 
or America; it has been neglected, misunderstood, 
and misjudged; indeed the time for fully appre- 
ciating the effects of mental states upon physical 
conditions, and of one mind upon another, has 
only newly arrived. The relation which hyp- 
notism bears to the subconscious mind and its 
strange and varied activities is only now begin- 



vi PREFACE, 

ning to be understood. The same is true of the 
uses of Hypnotism and Suggestion as educational 
and reformatory agents, and so of their greatly 
misjudged ethical relations. It is some of these 
special relations and utilities of hypnotism, as 
well as its more common therapeutic uses, that 
the present volume is intended to illustrate. 

Acknowledgments and thanks are due to the 
editors of the following periodicals for permission 
to revise and reprint material contributed to their 
columns : North American Review, The Coming 
Age, The New- York Medical Journal, Pediatrics, 
The Quarterly Journal of Inebriety, The Journal 
of the American Medical Association, The Jour- 
nal of the Society for Psychical Research. 

R. O. M. 

N^w York, 
March, 1901. 



CONTENTS, 



CHAPTER PAGE 

I. The Subjective Element in the Newer 

Therapeutics, i 

II. The Relation of Hypnotism to the Subcon- 
scious Mind, 47 

III. Cases in General Practice Treated by Hyp- 

notism AND Suggestion, .... 102 

IV. Educational Uses of Hypnotism, . . 133 
V. Forms of Suggestion Useful in the Treat- 
ment OF Inebriety, 179 

VI. Six Miscellaneous Cases Treated by Hypno- 
tism without Suggestion . . . .195 

VII. Concerning " Rapport," 214 

VIII. The Ethics of Hypnotism, .... 294 



/ 



HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 



CHAPTER I. 

THE SUBJECTIVE ELEMENT IN THE NEWER 
THERAPEUTICS. 

It is only recently — one might say within the 
past twenty years — that the psychic element in 
therapeutics has been recognised in any practical 
way by the medical profession; and it is through 
hypnotism mainly that its recognition, partial and 
insufficient as it is to-day, has been brought about. 
Along with this new element, and almost a part 
of it, another important psychological fact has 
come into view, namely, the existence and func- 
tion of the subconscious mind. These constitute 
what may be called the subjective element in 
therapeutics, in distinction from the use of drugs 
and other objective means of cure. 

Subjective methods have received little atten- 
tion and little sympathy from the majority of 



2 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

minds trained in modern scientific thought and 
method. They have been considered too nearly 
allied with the supernatural and visionary, espe- 
cially when applied to the cure of disease, to be 
worthy of serious attention. It may not prove 
unprofitable to notice the cause of this reluctance 
on the part of scientific men to observe and inves- 
tigate subjective or psychic phenomena, especially 
as related to the practice of the healing art — ^and 
also to note the utility and need of this same sub- 
jective element in therapeutics. 

Undoubtedly, the most progressive and pro- 
ductive mental work that has been accomplished 
during the past three hundred years has been done 
by means of processes chiefly objective in char- 
acter. Such is par excellence the method of 
science. It insists that there must be facts, thor- 
oughly established and accepted, from which 
properly viewed and compared general principles 
may be drawn; these in turn serving as helps in 
the discovery of still other and greater truths. 
The Occidental, and especially the Anglo-Saxon, 
mind demands this method; otherwise it finds 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 3 

scant and insufficient premisses from which to rea- 
son. It depends upon the senses for its material 
and upon the intellect for the use which it makes 
of this material. 

But there is another method of discovering 
truth — more intuitive, more daring, and much 
broader in its scope, though in a sense less sure in 
its conclusions. It is subjective in character and 
more in accord with Oriental thought and method. 
Instead of looking outward and observing the 
external world its method is to turn thought in- 
ward and to seek principles there; it reasons 
subtly upon the principles which it discovers and 
then endeavours to square the external world, 
which it accounts altogether a secondary affair, 
with these excogitated principles. This is espe- 
cially the method of the Oriental mind. 

Western knowledge is in the main objective, 
exoteric, derived from without; Eastern knowl- 
edge is subjective, esoteric, derived from within. 
The West, with youthful pride, is inclined to scorn 
the inwardly acquired wisdom of the East and 
sees neither proof nor profit in its reasoning; and 



4 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. . 

the East, with its hoary conservatism and subtlety 
of thought and reasoning, looks upon Western 
science as hew and crude — reaching results which 
they of the East consider rudimentary — even 
though not proven by the objective methods of 
the West. Is the West altogether right in its esti- 
mate of Oriental thought ? Is the East altogether 
wrong in its estimate of Western knowledge? 
Is there not a point of view in which the true value 
of each is considered and appreciated, and does 
not each gain by appropriating the strength of the 
other? An instance of the antagonism of these 
two methods of thought and their need of each 
other has been going on, as it were, under our own 
eyes, particularly during the last half century. It 
has been witnessed in the antagonism between 
science and religion; and it is pertinent to our 
purpose briefly to notice this conflict. 

Religion, as we have been accustomed to con- 
sider the term, is essentially Oriental. It came 
from the East, it partook of the nature of Eastern 
thought. It was the embodiment of duties, laws, 
and ceremonials which had reference to a concep- 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IM THERAPEUTICS. 5 

tion of God existing in and derived from the inner 
consciousness of the men who devised it. It pur- 
ported to be supernatural and to be absolute truth. 
Among other things it presented a cosmogony — 
a statement of the manner in which the universe 
and man came to be what they are. 

Three hundred years ago, when modern science 
was just appearing, Western thought began to 
rebel against this cosmogony. The young ob- 
jective science began to make observations upon 
the heavenly bodies and the relation of the earth 
to them, and it found as a fact that the earth as 
well as other heavenly bodies moved — that the 
earth was only one of several planets which re- 
volved not only around the sun, but also on their 
own axes. Eastern subjective thought, as devel- 
oped in at least one Oriental religion, was at 
fault, and Western objective science scored a 
victory. 

This was followed by a series of victories; Kep- 
ler and Newton discovered that nature was gov- 
erned according to law instead of the caprice of a 
humanly constructed deity. Cuvier and LyeU 



6 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

discovered that fossils were not freaks of nature, 
but remains of real animals and plants, distributed 
in an orderly manner throughout the strata of the 
earth's crust, forming a series of once living or- 
ganisms extending back through millions of 
years; so the meaning of the six days of creation 
must needs be changed to immense periods of 
time. Then Darwin and Wallace and their fol- 
lowers appeared and showed that, instead of sud- 
den successive creations of individuals or new 
species, the whole series of living forms was the 
result of evolution carried on by means of minute 
and slow variations. Religion seemed van- 
quished and science victorious all along the line. 
It had changed creation into evolution and arbi- 
trary government to law in nature — and the need 
of either creator or governor seemed banished. 
Deity was reduced to an unsatisfactory statement 
of force and law — and a lifeless materialism and 
uncertain agnosticism seemed to be the last word 
of science. 

But slowly there arose a protest from the in- 
most soul of man; it increased until it became a 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 7 

roar like that of the strong wind which precedes 
the bursting of the tempest. It was the voice of 
a universal sentiment in man, and with stern pur- 
pose it demanded an efficient cause. This resist- 
less voice cried out: ''you have shown us law; 
show us the giver of law. You have shown us a 
universe teeming with force, beauty, intelligence, 
sentiment, soul; show us the source of form, of 
beauty, of sentiment, of soul. If Jehovah did not 
make the world — who did ? " And lo ! there was 
silence, and the contending hosts stood still. 

Then again was heard a voice — it was no 
chorus of triumph — no rising tempest of protest 
or of sentiment. It was a single voice; there was 
a note almost of sadness in it, because it was 
alone — but it was no uncertain sound which it 
uttered— it was like the clear tone of a trumpet. 
And there stepped forth one of noble mien, be- 
tween the hosts; full panoplied and wearing the 
well-won insignia of science. And thus he spoke : 

" The confession which I feel bound to make 
before you is, that I prolong the vision backward 
across the boundary of experimental science and 



3 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

discover in matter itself . . . the promise and 
potency of every form and quality of life." 

Then there was clamour and confusion on 
either side. " He has gone out of the realm of 
science," quoth the conservative scientist. " He 
has found God," growled the agnostic and ma- 
terialist. " But it is not our God," cried the re- 
ligionist; and so they all turned their weapons 
upon Tyndall. 

But the word had gone forth and was heard 
throughout the civilised world; it signified that 
there was a psychic quality in Nature even in its 
lowest inorganic forms, striving through the aeons 
of time past for more and more perfect expression 
through the gradually ascending grades of or- 
ganism. This is the psychic potency which gives 
form to organism and which expresses itself 
through organism. 

The clamour which TyndalFs statement aroused 
has gradually subsided; the scientific world is 
coming to see that no objection can be urged 
against it that cannot with equal force be urged 
against any statement of a necessary self- 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. g 

existence or adequate cause; and the religionist 
finds God — only in a different form from that in 
which he had been accustomed to view him. So 
both the intellectual or objective and the emotional 
or subjective side of man's nature can be satisfied 
and harmonised; and, what is equally important, a 
subjective element is introduced into scientific 
method which has greatly increased its power and 
adapted it to the higher uses which the problems 
of to-day are demanding. 

It presents the initial force in evolution as a 
psychic force, permeating every particle of matter 
and every form of organism — securing higher and 
higher expression through more and more com- 
plex, and more nearly perfect organisms, until 
finally by this same psychic power the human or- 
ganism is evolved and regulated. 

The psychic element in man thus viewed is both 
dignified and powerful; it is part and parcel with 
the Divine force that is in nature, and is the high- 
est expression and representative of that Divine in 
nature as revealed to our senses. This psychic 
element in nature, taking its place as the Divine 



'10 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

energy permeating the universe — dwelling in it 
and working through it, instead of a humanly 
evolved Deity, dwelling and working outside of 
it — is the basis of the New Thought which is at 
present so powerfully influencing Christendom 
and indeed civilised man. It is thought, mind, 
the psychic element which, though subjective, is 
still active and efficient in nature; while form, or- 
ganism, and its activities are its phenomena — its 
objective manifestations. It is this fact — that the 
human organism is evolved by a psychic power 
within itself — that is the basis of the newer 
thought in therapeutics — for if the human organ- 
ism is evolved by a psychic force within itself, 
then that force is recuperative as well as forma- 
tive. And this, as a matter of observation and 
fact, we know to be true — so true and so thor- 
oughly accepted that the vis medicatrix natures is 
a power most confidently relied on in nearly every 
school of medicine, and is the foundation upon 
which every sensible method of cure is established. 
As usually considered, this recuperative power 
in nature is active without the consciousness or 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS, ii 

will of the patient. Is this process in any way 
influenced by the conscious mind and will ? Here 
again the consensus of all forms of medical belief 
and practice would be at least that a cheerful and 
hopeful frame of mind, and a strong and affirm- 
ing will, assist this recuperative process in nature, 
while despondency, doubt, and a feeble will just 
as surely hinder nature's benign efforts at cure. 
But, still further, can the conscious mind and will 
directly influence a person's own organism, so as 
to produce physiological changes and therapeutic 
effects; and can the mind and thought of one per- 
son so influence and impress the mind and thought 
of another person, as through that means to pro- 
duce the same psysiological changes and the same 
therapeutic effects? Upon these last questions 
the medical world, and indeed the whole intelli- 
gent, thinking world, is divided. 

Glance for a moment at the development of the 
therapeutic idea as shown in history. It is seen 
that the idea of cure was at first associated en- 
tirely with the supernatural. The cause of dis- 
ease and the cure were equally according to the 



12 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

will of the gods; and certain rites and ceremonies 
were practised whose purpose it was to placate the 
gods and insure their good offices to ward off 
disease and cure the afflicted. Not until the time 
of Greek civilisation, as represented by Homer, 
does the office of the physician and surgeon as a 
distinct profession come into view, and even then 
the gods played a conspicuous part. It was the 
invisible arrows of Apollo that caused the epi- 
demic which destroyed first the mules and hounds, 
and then sent whole legions of Greek heroes " to 
the dark cave where no light comes." And it is 
Calchas, the priest and soothsayer, who suggests 
the remedy, while Machaon and Podalirius, repre- 
senting medicine and surgery, attended to the 
common casualties of war and camp. From this 
time on medicine has had a history; and it ex- 
hibits the same contest between science and senti- 
ment regarding therapeutics as was exhibited on 
so grand a scale between science and sentiment re- 
garding religion. 

At the acme of Greek civilisation, and con- 
temporary with the best Greek philosophers and 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 13 

statesmen, Hippocrates appeared as a representa- 
tive of medicine. Of the science of medicine as 
now understood he knew but Httle, but he had a 
high conception of the office and status of the phy- 
sician, as is shown by the Hippocratic oath still 
taken by so many educated physicians. He 
recognised disease as a process, running a course 
and governed by law, which the physician must 
understand in order to know the needed remedy 
and whether his medicines helped or hindered 
this natural course of the disease. So close ob- 
servation of disease, its symptoms, its course and 
probable termination, together with a belief in the 
power of Nature to accomplish much toward re- 
covery, and also the belief that art could often 
assist Nature in her efforts to restore health, was 
the foundation upon which scientific medicine was 
established and has been built up. It was sound 
common sense making use of the true scientific 
method, namely, observation and induction. 

On the scientific side the foundations have been 
widened and deepened by new knowledge, slowly 
acquired century after century. First came a 



14 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

knowledge of anatomy, as studied at Alexandria 
three hundred years before our era; then by Galen, 
and then by Vesalius in the sixteenth century. 
Then, in the seventeenth century, came the dis- 
covery of the circulation of the blood by Harvey, 
and, as a natural consequence, the indications of 
the pulse, and a new physiology. Then came the 
closer study of special organs and their diseases, 
as, for instance, the diseases of the kidneys by 
Bright; of the chest, and especially of the heart, by 
Stokes; of the lungs by Laennec, and of the skin 
by Willan. No non-professional person can form 
any idea of the great value of these contributions 
to scientific medicine made by each of these and 
many other scientific workers. Think of the vast 
amount of comfort and usefulness which has come 
to the human race through the scientific study of 
the eye amd its diseases and deficiencies! Think 
of the vast saving of life, and the incalculable 
amount of relief from suffering and misery, which 
have come to woman through the scientific work 
of Sims and McDowell and their followers in the 
development of gynecology! 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 15 

But Still again, consider the immense saving of 
human life through the discovery of vaccination 
by Jenner! Epidemics of small-pox no longer 
exist among people where vaccination is compul- 
sory or is even voluntarily practised. Where 
human beings were formerly swept off by thou- 
sands and tens of thousands, both in city and 
country, and physicians of every school were help- 
less to prevent, now to this disgusting, death-deal- 
ing plague it can with authority be commanded, 
'' Thus far shalt thou come and no farther." 
Consider the saving of human life by antiseptic 
surgery and midwifery, and by antiseptic meas- 
ures applied in hospitals and sick-rooms every- 
where; and again by the potent means of prevent- 
ing and cutting short diseases which have come to 
us through the discoveries relating to micro- 
scopic organisms known as bacilli and bacteria ! 

Such is only a faint outline of what has been 
accom.plished by scientific methods by scientific 
medical men. At first weak and comparatively 
ignorant, scientific medicine has always pursued 
the one course — observation of facts, and com- 



i6 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

mon sense in endeavouring to find the principle 
which lay hidden in the facts. True, it has often 
erred, but it has desired truth. 

From first to last there has always been opposed 
to this scientific or objective school of medicine, 
as represented by Hippocrates, Galen, Sydenham, 
and later by the great medical schools of Italy, 
Germany, France, England, and still later of 
America, another class of medical practitioners 
governed by subjective methods — ^by sentiment 
and feeling. In the Homeric repi sentation of 
medicine the physician and surgeon, Podalirius 
and Machaon, were offset by the priest and sooth- 
sayer, Calchas; and in the later Greek history the 
oracle and temples of health vied with the scien- 
tific medicine of the time. In Rome, in addition 
to these esoteric or subjective methods, the regular 
school of Hippocratic medicine was divided, and 
a so-called Pneumonic school was founded in the 
first century of our era. According to this sect 
the normal as well as diseased actions of the body 
were to be referred to the Pneuma or universal 
soul; and even Galen, in addition to his scientific 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 17 

studies, was to a degree influenced by this thought. 
In the early Middle Ages, when medical as well as 
many other kinds of learning was confined to the 
monasteries, science, even such as had previously 
existed, was almost extinguished, and medicine 
presented an anomalous mixture of magic and 
superstition, with the distorted scraps of medical 
knowledge which had traditionally come down to 
those times. 

During the eleventh and twelfth centuries the 
influence of th '^rt and philosophy of the Arabians 
and Spanish Moors began to be felt upon medical 
science. This influence is best represented by 
Averroes of Cordova, with his theory of the one- 
ness of intellect — ^humanity being the chosen 
vehicle through which this intellect was revealed, 
and its difference in individuals being simply dif- 
ference in their degree of enlightenment. These 
ideas greatly influenced his conception of medical 
science, and made the curative principle to reside 
within man himself, but to be guided by the 
highest obtainable medical knowledge. 

Early in the sixteenth century Paracelsus 



i8 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

taught in his vigorous and arrogant fashion the 
doctrine that the human body was a microcosm 
corresponding to the macrocosm, or external uni- 
verse, and to know man, sun, moon, and stars — 
all nature — must be studied. There was also an 
indwelling Archus which controlled all. Disease 
was not natural, but spiritual. His whole teach- 
ing was in opposition to accepted scientific medi- 
cine. In the next century Van Helmont revived 
the Archus of Paracelsus with variations and 
changes, and the symptoms of disease were sup- 
posed to be caused by the passions and perturba- 
tions of this Archus; and medicines were accord- 
ingly given to modify these perturbations. 

Late in the eighteenth century Mesmer, an edu- 
cated and scientific physician with a tendency to 
transcendental theories, appeared with his theory 
of animal magnetism, which afterward took his 
name and was known as mesmerism. 

Without stopping to indicate minor attacks 
upon regular scientific medicine, we will hasten to 
notice the most important one of the early years 
of the present century, namely, homoeopathy as 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 19 

first set forth by Hahnemann. Here again ap- 
pears the Archus of Paracelsus and Van Helmont 
as our spiritual, vital principle, and disease is the 
derangement of that principle. Psoria, or itch, 
was the chief cause of the chronic diseases. 
Hahnemann also held that the power of nature 
was not to be relied upon for the cure of disease — 
on the contrary, it rather tended to do harm; but 
nature had provided remedies which, when prop- 
erly applied, were sufficient for cure; that the law 
of cure was " like cures like," and that, disease 
being spiritual in character, the remedies must, as 
nearly as possible, approach to the spiritual condi- 
tion, and accordingly the potency of medicines in- 
creased with their approach to this spiritual con- 
dition. Hence the dilutions which characterise 
the homoeopathic pharmacopoeia. 

The latter part of the present century has been 
prolific in protests against scientific medicine. 
They have come in the form of spiritual healing, 
the various faith cures, mind cures, and especially 
metaphysical healing and Christian Science. The 
nature and attitude of these last-named methods 



20 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

of cure are well known, and need not now be re- 
hearsed. It is not my present object to criticise 
these various schools or methods of cure, but 
simply to indicate them and their relation to the 
great body of objective or scientific medicine. 
Their appearance all along the way has been a pro- 
test of the transcendental, spiritual, emotional side 
of man's nature against the purely physical and in- 
tellectual; of the subjective against the objective; 
of the esoteric, or that which comes from within, 
against the exoteric, or that which is learned from 
without. First it was supernatural — the direct 
interposition of the gods. Then it was the intel- 
lectual and spiritual oneness of Averroes carried 
out in philosophy, religion, and medicine; then 
the Archus of Paracelsus and Van Helmont; then 
the influence of animal magnetism as taught by 
Mesmer; then the spiritual nature of both disease 
and remedies of Hahnemann; and last the de- 
parture, quite outside the profession of medicine, 
— faith, mind, and spiritual cures, and, most im- 
portant and imposing. Christian Science and meta- 
physical healing, — all except a more conservative 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT W THERAPEUTICS. 21 

portion of the last-named cult discarding and 
ignoring both science and medicine. 

While science was in swaddling-clothes, and 
sentiment only expressed itself in the super- 
natural, but little mutual influence was exerted 
by these two widely differing modes of thought; 
but little by little the claims of the sentimental, 
the subjective, became more and more definite and 
positive, and were met by more and more deter- 
mined hostility on the part of science. It was the 
old battle between science and religion, between 
objective and subjective, over again upon another 
field. In each case the aggressors have obtained 
their object. It is fully recognised by religion, 
representing the psychic and transcendental side 
of human nature, that the intellect, the under- 
standing, which is represented by science, can- 
not be ignored or stultified; and the intellectual — 
the scientific — side now fully recognises the fact 
that there is a psychic element which has its laws 
and must be respected. So, in the struggle for 
adjustment regarding disease and its treatment, 
scientific medicine is coming to recognise a 



2 2 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

psychic element and to see that it is potent, and 
to-day that psychic element is being studied and 
observed from a scientific standpoint as it has 
never been studied before; and, on the other hand, 
the psychic, the transcendental element is learning 
and has yet further to learn that the intellect is an 
important factor in any system that is to endure, 
and that the results of scientific investigations can- 
not be ignored. In the adjustment of these two 
ideas is the construction of the Newer Thera- 
peutics. 

Having thus briefly indicated the two elements 
which have entered into the contest regarding the 
cure of disease, it is well to examine somewhat 
carefully the contribution which each has made to 
the system of therapeutics which must in the near 
future become dominant. 

I have already indicated some of the more im- 
portant contributions which scientific medicine 
has made to the world and to the body of facts 
which go to make up what may be called the 
knowledge side of the health-preserving and 
health-restoring art. To it we owe the knowledge 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 23 

of anatomy and physiology, the two noble pillars 
standing at the entrance gate to all true knowl- 
edge of medical art. To the same source we owe 
a knowledge of the circulation of the blood and 
the relation which pulse and temperature bear to 
disease; to it we owe all the delicate means of ex- 
ploration of the different organs which character- 
ise all sound medical teaching and practice — aus- 
cultation and percussion, or listening to the sounds 
which different organs produce in health, and 
variations from the normal sounds in disease, 
especially of the heart and lungs, and the organs 
of the abdominal cavity. To science we owe all 
the instruments of discovery and of precision so 
necessary to the proper detection and treatment of 
disease; the discovery and practical use of anaes- 
thetics, especially chloroform, ether, and nitrous- 
oxide gas, and the inestimable blessings of anaes- 
thesia in surgery and midwifery; the discovery of 
vaccination and the uses of antiseptics both in sur- 
gery and in the sick-room; the control of epidemic 
diseases like cholera and yellow fever by cleanli- 
ness and disinfectants, and the as yet only half- 



i4 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

developed blessings which have resulted from the 
scientific study of bacteriology. 

These discoveries, quite independent of medi- 
cine proper or drugs and their uses, furnish a 
mere outline of the contributions of scientific 
medical men to the knowledge side of medicine 
and to the comfort, safety, and well-being of man- 
kind. 

On the other hand, note the contributions 
which have come from the representatives of the 
transcendental side of medicine. In the first 
place they all, from Paracelsus to the most 
recently inducted practitioner of Christian 
Science, consciously or unconsciously have helped 
to press and prove the claim of the psychic ele- 
ment in the cure of disease. Beyond that, the two 
cults or schools of therapeutics which have con- 
tributed most that is of permanent value to the 
practice of the healing art are that introduced by 
Mesmer and his followers, and that by Hahne- 
mann and his followers. 

In regard to homoeopathy : Its contributions to 
a true and broad system of cure have been partly 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 25 

positive or direct, and partly incidental. It di- 
rectly and positively declared a basis of refinement 
and spirituality in disease and the corresponding 
cure, and it protested against the violent medica- 
tion of the time when it was introduced, by show- 
ing equally good and often better results while 
using what seemed practically to be no medicine 
at all; and incidentally it contributed one of the 
most important items of knowledge which have 
been added to scientific medicine during the 
present century, namely, a knowledge of the self- 
limited nature of a large class of diseases unin- 
fluenced by medicine in any form. I will illus- 
trate this fact by a single example. Scarlet fever 
w^as one of the diseases in which homoeopathy in 
its early days claimed its greatest triumphs; and 
physicians of the old school looked on with amaze- 
ment and envy, seeing this scourge of childhood 
treated with far better results than were obtained 
by their own more severe methods, and they were 
led to inquire what was the secret of this success. 
They did not believe that the third or the thirtieth 
dilution of aconite or belladonna caused the cure. 



26 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

In their eyes it was equivalent to no medication 
at all, and they accordingly commenced to treat 
these cases entirely without medicine, simply giv- 
ing the patient the advantage of fresh air, cooling 
drinks, and general comfort. 

The results were startling, and fully equal to 
those of the homoeopathic treatment. The same 
course was then pursued with other contagious 
diseases of childhood, and with the same success. 
The patients got well without medicine in the 
same time that they did with the most orthodox 
old-school or homoeopathic treatment. Hence, 
the study of the natural limitation of many 
diseases uninfluenced by medicine was pursued in 
a truly scientific spirit, and with the result of dif- 
ferentiating a large class of absolutely self-limited 
diseases, and also establishing the fact of the small 
value of drugs and the great value of hygiene 
and good nursing in another large class, namely, 
incurable diseases. Thus, while the law of 
siniiUa simiUhiis ctirantur was neither original 
nor true in any broad sense, and its doctrine of 
hig"h dilutions seemed opposed to reason and com- 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 2 J 

tnon sense, the influence, direct and indirect, of 
homoeopathy upon the general practice of medi- 
cine has been both great and salutary. Of late it 
is itself acknowledging the value of scientific 
knowledge, — of anatomy, physiology, and diag- 
nosis, — which it formerly practically ignored, and 
science is accepting something of its finer senti- 
ment and its use of small doses of medicine; and 
so an approach to a higher method of medical 
practice is symbolised. 

The other subjective or transcendental mode of 
treatment of disease which has contributed its 
quota to a true scientific system of therapeutics 
is the method variously known as animal mag- 
netism, mesmerism, hypnotism, and suggestion. 
This system or method has had a most singular 
and chequered career. While it has been known 
and practised for thousands of years, it was intro- 
duced into modern use by Mesmer near the close 
of the last century. The French Academy inves- 
tigated the subject several times, reporting some- 
times favourably, sometimes unfavourably, and 
sometimes not at all; varying it would seem with 



2§ HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

the prejudices of the individual members of the 
investigating committee. Under the name of 
mesmerism it attracted much attention in France 
and England during the first thirty years of 
the last century, but always meeting with the 
fiercest opposition of the regular school of medi- 
cine and always being looked upon with suspicion 
as fraud and quackery. In 1842 it was taken up 
by Braid, a respectable English surgeon, rechris- 
tened hypnotism, and given a sort of doubtful or 
semi-scientific status. But it was soon neglected. 
In 1877 th^ subject was again studied by Charcot, 
the eminent French authority on diseases of the 
nervous system, in the wards of La Salpetriere, 
and the hypnotic condition and phenomena were 
by him declared to be genuine and well established 
as matters of fact; and the prestige of his name 
gave it a standing among medical men such as it 
had never before possessed. 

Then Liebeault and Bernheim of Nancy began 
the study by a most careful system of experiments 
carried on in general practice and in the wards of 
the general civil hospital at that place. These 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 29 

physicians also asserted the genuineness of the 
hypnotic phenomena, and declared suggestion to 
be the main element concerned both in the produc- 
tion of the hypnotic condition and also in the 
numerous cures which were accomplished by it. 
Since then the subject has been still more exten- 
sively studied and proved by practical use in 
many great cities of Europe, especially in France, 
Switzerland, Italy, Germany, Sweden, and 
Russia, and to a limited degree also in England 
and America. 

The one important contribution which hyp- 
notism has made to a rational system of therapeu- 
tics is its full demonstration of the influence of 
the mind over the various organs and functions of 
the body. It took a hundred years to put an end 
to doubt as to the truth and genuineness of the 
hypnotic condition and phenomena. Its effects 
were so startling and beyond scientific explana- 
tion that it was believed to be the result of fraud, 
of diabolical influence, of magic, of supernatural 
forces, of anything but the plain and simple truth; 
but, vouched for by such men as Charcot, Bern- 



30 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

heim, Liebeault, and Voisin, in France; Braid, 
Esdaile, Gurney, Tuckey, and Bramwell, in Eng- 
land, and other equally well-known and reputable 
men all over the world, its genuineness and its 
usefulness were established in the minds of most 
candid and intelligent persons who really took the 
trouble to know about it. 

Scores of physicians were using hypnotism and 
curing forms of disease, organic and functional, 
and also mental, — many of which had baffled their 
skill under any form of medical treatment, — by 
simply putting the patient into the hypnotic con- 
dition without suggestion of any kind. Then 
Bernheim added suggestion, with its mighty influ- 
ence, to the results already achieved. 

Here also it was demonstrated that the deep 
hypnotic sleep was not necessary, and often not 
desirable, in order to produce the best results by 
suggestion, but simply a passive subjective con- 
dition, with the mind in harmony with the object 
to be attained by the suggestion. 

It may here be fairly asked : Has it been defi- 
nitely established, by experiments thoroughly 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 31 

carried out, that the mind can control physical, 
physiological processes in the body — the process, 
for instance, of digestion or lactation? Can it 
cause a blister to be raised upon sound and healthy 
skin without the application of any irritant or any 
medicinal substance whatever? These are test 
examples, and they have all been successfully 
carried out under the supervision of perfectly 
honest and competent witnesses, many of them 
under my own observation and treatment. 

A principle, then, is here established. The 
mind can be so concentrated upon a physiological 
process as to stimulate that process to unusual 
activity, so as to produce curative effects, and 
even to superabundant activity, so as to produce 
pathological effects, or disease. For instance, in 
the hypnotic condition a key or a coin has been 
placed upon the healthy skin with the suggestion 
that at a given time, say two hours after waking, 
a blister would appear at the spot where the key 
or coin had been placed, and of corresponding size 
and shape. The key or coin is then removed and 
the patient awakened, having no conscious knowl- 



32 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

edge of the suggestion given; but at the appointed 
time the blister appears. Again, two blisters, 
one upon one arm and another upon the corre- 
sponding part of the other arm, in the same indi- 
vidual, have in this manner been produced, but 
with the suggestion that one would rapidly heal 
without pain, while the other would become in- 
flamed and painful ; and the suggestions have been 
perfectly carried out. Nothing could more abso- 
lutely certify the power of suggestion over physio- 
logical processes. 

The powerful effect of suggestion, especially in 
the hypnotic condition, is in this manner fully 
demonstrated. It is a fact, and a fact of greater 
significance and greater value, as a curative agent 
simply, than any other single fact in the recent his- 
tory of therapeutics. For, not only is it curative 
in physical ailments, but also in mental and moral 
deficiencies and criminal tendencies. In other 
words, it is the educational uses of hypnotic sug- 
gestion that constitute one of its chief claims to 
favourable recognition. 

In speaking of the therapeutic and educational 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 33 

uses of hypnotism, I speak from an experience of 
many years, and covering a great variety of physi- 
cal, mental, and moral ailments; but in nothing 
has the admirable effect of hypnotism and sug- 
gestion been so manifest and striking as in the 
changes wrought in the character and habits of 
neglected, vicious, and criminal children in every 
grade of society, and even in persons of mature 
age. While to relieve pain and suffering, and 
disease of the body, whether by those objective 
means which science points out or by those more 
subtle and often more effective methods which 
pertain to the action of the mind, is a humane and 
splendid mission, it is more especially in effectu- 
ally saying to the thief, " Steal no more "; to the 
vagabond, " Look up — let your ideals be elevated 
and your life made useful "; to the slaves of hurt- 
ful narcotic and intoxicating drugs, and degrad- 
ing habits, " Be free, — ^be pure," — that one 
realises the divine that can be found in every hu- 
man being, and also the divine mission of cure. 

It will doubtless be asked. What relation do 
Christian Science, metaphysical healing, and the 



34 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

numerous sects of faith cures bear to the true sys- 
tem of therapeutics ? 

Against Christian Science there is at least this 
plain indictment — it calls upon its adherents to 
give loose rein to the emotional, transcendental 
side of their nature, and ignore the scientific, intel- 
lectual side altogether. It discredits the senses 
and declares that their representations are false; 
that what we seem to see or hear or feel are but 
illusions, and have no real existence; that noth- 
ing exists but God, consequently disease, evil, and 
death do not exist. Matter and the external 
world are illusions of mortal mind. All that is 
wonderfully high-sounding and sentimental. It 
is just the kind of sentimentality to make people 
whose emotional natures are altogether dominant 
turn their eyes heavenward in an ecstasy of feel- 
ing, but, when the ship on which they sail strikes 
the rock, there is a strong inclination to think and 
to acknowledge that there has been an impact be- 
tween two real and very material objects. When 
one is trying with pain and danger to escape from 
the blinding, blistering smoke and flame of a burn- 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 35 

ing dwelling, it is a bad time for sentiment, and it 
is easy to believe that fire is material and has an 
existence quite independent of mortal mind; and 
when after days of fasting a cup of soup or a well- 
prepared steak is presented, one has little doubt 
that protoplasm is a very real thing and has a 
function and mission in the world which mind 
alone cannot fulfil. In other words, our normal 
senses do not lie, and so to accuse them is the 
grossest insult to the grand combination of spirit 
and organism which we know as man. 

Observe one of the senses. Let it be sight. 
How did its organ, the eye, come to be an organ ? 
Millions and millions of years ago a portion of 
organised protoplasm, in animal form, existed. 
There were also sea and sky and light, but no eye 
to behold them. In the process of time, in a par- 
ticular spot in the protoplasm of that animal 
form, a peculiar sensitiveness was set up in rela- 
tion to light. Later a slight bulging appeared at 
that spot — it was an incipient lens, as yet almost 
opaque. But there was a perception of light and 
then of the absence of light; the difference be- 



36 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

tween light and darkness could be perceived. 
Thousands of years later the lens had become 
semi-transparent — the outline of objects began to 
be perceived. Again thousands of years passed 
(for nature does no constructive work in haste), 
the lens was transparent — the whole wonderful 
apparatus was complete, and the sense perfected 
which we now know and enjoy as sight. 

Nature laboured through all these millions of 
years to perfect that sense along with others, to 
give us a knowledge of external objects, — to 
make two great sources of man's happiness, intel- 
ligence and beauty, possible, -and took the trouble 
through so many ages to arrange and perfect this 
scheme, this action of the senses, for educating 
man, for giving him a sense of beauty and art and 
music, — this magnificent plan for making man a 
man, — and now Mrs. Eddy and our sublimated, 
transcendental friends have discovered that it is 
all a stupendous hoax. No such external world 
as our senses discover exists. All is simply a 
phantasm, an illusion of mortal mind. 

But carry the argument on to its logical con- 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 37 

elusion. Nothing but God exists ; that is, nothing 
but a transcendental, unmanifested, unthinkable 
God. Then, the senses which deceive us do not 
exist, mortal mind does not exist; consequently, 
there is no thought, and no illusion or hallucina- 
tion. What is the difficulty? Simply this. The 
transcendental, emotional side of human nature 
has been allowed full sway, uncorrected by the 
understanding, and it has run wild. Eddyism 
has been evolved out of an exuberant, ill-regu- 
lated, emotional, subconscious mind, without the 
supervision of a disciplined intelligence; and the 
consequences are, as they always have been, 
simply disastrous. It is the old story of Icarus 
with his waxen wings flying too near the sun. 
Medio tutissimus ibis, said his wise mentor. So 
say we to the Christian Scientist : " You will go , 
safest in a middle course." 

But you will reply: The results, the cures, — - 
what are you to do with the cures ? Let us exam- 
ine them. First of all, the adherents of Christian 
Science pride themselves upon their ability to dis- 
pense with all knowledge of the human body, of 



38 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

the location, kind, and nature of the disease to be 
treated — and upon their disregard of hygiene and 
the laws of health. "If there were less thought 
bestowed upon hygiene there would be better con- 
stitutions and better health," teaches the prophet- 
ess. We are therefore called upon to accept the 
report about diseased conditions, of people who 
know nothing about diseased conditions. We 
cannot expect their reports to be even approxi- 
mately correct, and certainly they are not. I am 
not charging dishonesty; I am charging absolute 
incompetence to observe the class of facts con- 
cerning w^hich they assume to report. 

Supposing it became evident that a certain class 
of engines used by a railroad company had a vice 
which materially interfered with their efficiency, 
what sort of persons would the sensible and prac- 
tical directors employ to discover and rectify the 
evil? Would they send persons who in the first 
place knew nothing of the construction of the 
engines, and in the second place did not believe 
there was anything the matter with them, and in 
the third place did not believe in the existence of 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 39 

engines? And yet it is exactly such persons 
whose report we are called upon to believe and ac- 
cept regarding that most intricate and perfect 
piece of mechanism, the human body. 

But, taking the reports as they come, and ana- 
lysing fairly a series of miscellaneous cases as re- 
ported by Christian Science healers, we should 
find the following to be a fair statement of the 
result. Of a hundred or a thousand consecutive 
cases one-fourth would be found to consist of 
trivial or imaginary diseases, simple cases which 
rapidly get well of themselves without interfer- 
ence of any kind. Another fourth would be the 
great class of self-limited diseases. Another 
fourth would consist of cases of real and perhaps 
grave disease which are reported to be cured, but 
which in reality are not cured. For Christian 
Science allows no case to be reported as not cured. 
If the thought of disease is banished, the disease, 
in their phraseology, is cured, though the physical 
conditions remain unchanged. The '' manifesta- 
tion " of the cure is simply delayed. What are 
we to do with the statistics of such persons ? 



40 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

There is a remaining fourth, which is a liberal 
allowance for cases of real disease cured or re- 
lieved by the treatment. The impprtant point is, 
what was the real element of cure in these last 
cases ? Evidently some effect produced upon the 
mind of the patient, and so upon the diseased con- 
dition. We have seen how physiological changes 
can be made by suggestion, either auto-sugges- 
tion or suggestion impressed upon the patient by 
a second person. This must be reckoned an 
established fact. It is in this way and no other 
that all the cases of cure, whether by relics of the 
saints or at shrines and grottoes, whether by faith 
cures, metaphysicians, or Christian Scientists, are 
accomplished; and this is in full accord with 
nature's plans and methods. 

In the foregoing pages my object has been to 
bring before the mind of the reader as clearly as 
possible, even at the risk of some reiteration, cer- 
tain propositions which in my judgment are most 
important, and a careful consideration of which 
is most necessary to a proper understanding of the 
Newer Therapeutics. Among these facts are : 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 41 

(i) That the things which have been estab- 
lished by science as practical and useful, such for 
instance as vaccination, antisepsis, and bacteri- 
ology, as well as certain well-proved means of 
cure, cannot be ignored in the construction of any 
new system of therapeutics, any more than the 
facts which relate to cure by psychic methods can 
be ignored. 

(2) That cures by psychic methods of what- 
ever kind or by whatever sect are not miraculous 
or supernatural, but are accomplished according 
to natural laws, physical and psychical, and hence 
are proper subjects for scientific study. 

(3) Tyndall's announcement in 1874 of a 
" potency and promise " inherent in matter itself 
is a most important one as related to psychic 
therapeutics, since, carried out to its logical 
sequences, it means that this inherent potency is 
itself psychic ; that it is the motive and formative 
power in all subsequent development, in the pro- 
duction of organisms and in the activity of the 
functions which maintain life and health in these 
organisms — in short, that mind forms and domi- 



42 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

nates all organisms, consequently it forms and 
dominates the human organism; and, if it domi- 
nates, it can heal. 

(4) That suggestion is the great principle by 
which psychic cures of every kind and degree are 
effected. 

These propositions are fundamental and relate 
to the ever-recurring conflict between objective 
and subjective methods, between the understand- 
ing and the emotions. I have endeavoured to 
show how necessary to the best results is their 
union and harmonious action, and how disastrous 
is their divorce. 

The subjective method, upon whatever matter 
engaged, represents foresight, initiative, motive 
power, but it is liable to misdirection in its appli- 
cation, to squander energy and meet defeat. The 
objective method represents experience, knowl- 
edge, reserve force, caution, guidance. It has 
been the conservative clinging to the exclusive 
and excessive use of drugs in the cure of disease, 
and the scorn and neglect with which it has treated 
subjective, psychic means of cure, that have 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 43 

brought the therapeutic part of the old objective, 
scientific school of medicine into distrust. It is 
the dense ignorance and foolhardy disregard, on 
the part of some of its practitioners, of useful and 
sensible means of prevention and cure which 
science has put in their hands that is now bringing 
deserved reproach upon the exclusive and indis- 
criminate use of psychic methods of cure. 

This mutual crimination and distrust, this 
claiming all for itself by each party, should cease. 
A union of what is found most true and useful in 
both the old and new, in the objective and sub- 
jective, must take place; and " truth, from what- 
ever source," must be the watchword. 

But suggestion will be recognised as the domi- 
nant factor in the Newer Therapeutics, and the 
hypnotic condition, it should be noted, increases 
the value of suggestion a hundred-fold. At 
present such treatment may be too transcendental 
for the majority of the objective school, and it is 
too scientific and objective for the majority of the 
transcendental school, but whether it be sugges- 
tion in the normal state or in the hypnotic condi- 



44 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

tion, — whether auto-suggestion or suggestion 
given by a second person, whether audible or 
silent and mental, whether present or absent, — 
suggestion is still the active, working principle, 
the subtle agent which influences all. But it is 
chiefly by direct, audible suggestion, in the more 
or less complete hypnotic condition, that the most 
certain results are obtained. Then the normal con- 
sciousness is in abeyance, as in ordinary sleep; the 
subconscious mind, the subliminal self, is awake 
and accessible; and the subconscious mind is then 
responsive to true and wholesome suggestion. 

Those absurd and superstitious ideas regarding 
hypnotism which even now to some extent prevail 
must be dispelled by science and enlightenment. 
It is only nature's method of harmonising and in- 
creasing vital force — of bringing two persons 
into such relations that the physical, mental, or 
moral needs of one may be more surely and effect- 
ively supplied by the other. The very condition 
of hypnotic sleep is healthful, useful, and elevat- 
ing. The Greeks named it the sacred sleep. It 
is simply carrying out a divine law of rest and 



PSYCHIC ELEMENT IN THERAPEUTICS. 45 

healing; and when to that is added the grand 
power of suggestion, the results are great beyond 
what at first seems possible. 

Finally, let it be remembered that there are two 
principles in nature, and they can never be di- 
vorced. There is matter and there is spirit, and 
either is incomplete without the other. It is im- 
possible truly to conceive of matter deprived of 
its psychic element, its attribute of attraction, its 
power of choice, its loves; and spirit without 
matter is unthinkable; it is impossible to con- 
ceive of the psychic element of attraction, of 
affinity, of love, of thought, except in connection 
with matter. God himself could no more exist 
in his completeness without a universe than a uni- 
verse could exist without God. The soul — the 
psychic element in man — can no more exist with- 
out a body than the body as a living organism 
can exist without a soul. " Nor soul helps flesh 
more, now, than flesh helps soul," and wherever 
soul exists there must be body suited to its needs. 

Our plea then is for a fuller recognition of the 
psychic element in man and the important part 



46 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

which it plays in therapeutics. It is no longer 
associated with super naturalism or superstition — 
it is neither transcendental nor visionary, but real, 
dignified, and worthy. Hypnotism and a knowl- 
edge of the functions of the subconscious mind 
have brought the subject into the realm of experi- 
mental knowledge and all who will may know its 
value. 

It should be known far and wide — in the pro- 
fession and out of it — that there is a subjective, a 
psychic element in the practice of the healing art, 
and it is in that direction rather than in the multi- 
plication of drugs that the therapeutics of the 
future is to be enriched. 



CHAPTER 11. 

THE RELATION OF HYPNOTISM TO THE SUB- 
CONSCIOUS MIND. 

The recently recognised part of the psychic 
entity — the subconscious mind, with its special ac- 
tivities — is proving itself to be a most important 
and useful agent in solving psychic problems. 
Unusual phenomena, such for example as trance, 
trance utterances, veridical dreams, phantasms, 
automatic writing and speaking, and the whole 
range of similar phenomena are no longer reck- 
oned either as supernatural or unknowable, but 
the psychic condition, now variously known as the 
subconscious mind, the subliminal self, and the 
second personality, being once recognised, all 
these phenomena fall into line as having a well- 
defined relationship with this newly differentiated 
condition. 

The real importance of this condition is not 
even now fully recognised. The extraordinary 
work of persons who all along the course of hu- 

47 



48 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

man history have attracted the wondering gaze 
of mankind has been very differently estimated by 
those who have attempted to analyse that work 
and judge the persons through whom the work 
has appeared. In matters of religion these con- 
spicuous persons have been reckoned as inspired — 
the recipients of influences, knowledge, and 
powers from some source entirely foreign to 
themselves — some divine or supernatural source; 
in literature, art, and music the indefinite term 
" genius " has sufficed for explanation — ^but 
neither inspiration nor genius has ever received 
any such clear and definite statement regarding 
its source and office as to win universal assent even 
among the most enlightened minds, and the 
source of the influence and power of such con- 
spicuous personages as Buddha and Jesus, of 
Socrates, Joan of Arc, and Swedenborg — of Mi- 
chael Angelo and Leonardo da Vinci, of Homer 
and Dante, of Beethoven and Wagner is still a 
matter of discussion. 

Whence come the highest conceptions in 
religion, in literature and art? From the fanci- 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 49 

ful Speculations of supernaturalism and the un- 
satisfactory lucubrations of materialism, men 
of the most solid and conservative character 
in every department of study are turning 
their attention to the subconscious mind as the 
immediate source and vehicle through which 
these superior and sometimes seemingly miracu- 
lous manifestations of wisdom, influence, and 
executive power have appeared. It will be seen 
therefore that the subject of the reality, functions, 
and limitations of the subconscious mind is an 
important one, and, in investigating it, it will be 
seen how important an agent hypnotism has 
proved itself to be, and to what an extent true 
psychology is its debtor. 

Of the reality of the subconscious mind and 
some of its important functions I have treated in 
a former volume entitled " Telepathy and the 
Subliminal Self," and it is not necessary to go 
over the subject in detail here; an outline of the 
proof, however, is desirable, and reference to 
cases there cited may be necessary. 

A hundred or even fifty years ago philosophers 



50 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

and students of psychology had no definite knowl- 
edge of different personalities or different states 
of consciousness in persons who were reckoned 
as sane, but believed that personality in each indi- 
vidual was always one and the same, and was 
" not divisible into parts," but more recently facts 
have been observed which bear strongly upon the 
subject and seem plainly to indicate that, while the 
individual may remain the same identical indi- 
vidual, the personalities which constitute the in- 
dividual in his entirety may vary often and com- 
pletely; and it is this distinction between a person- 
ality and an individual which must particularly 
be borne in mind. 

In regard to this change in personality the 
cases of Felida X. and Ansel Bourne are classic 
and well known, and to these I have added 
that of Alma Z., coming under my own observa- 
tion. In each of these cases there was an entire 
change of personality, suddenly appearing and 
lasting for a period varying from a few hours to 
many weeks. Felida X., in her primary or usual 
condition, was in miserable health, discontented, 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 51 

fault-finding, and wretched; in her second state 
she was in good health, cheerful, and happy. 
The primary consciousness or personality knew 
nothing of the second condition, but the time oc- 
cupied by it was to her a blank, and on the return 
to her ordinary state she had no remembrance of 
what had transpired while the second personality 
was present. The second personality knew of the 
primary, but only as an entirely different person, 
whom she differed from in every respect, disliked, 
with whom she did not wish to associate, and for 
whom she protested against being mistaken. 
The second personality was her best condition 
and eventually came to be the dominant self. In 
this personality she married, reared children, 
carried on a business, and enjoyed life; disturbed 
only for short periods, and at long intervals, by 
the sickly, ill-tempered primary self. This case 
has been under observation now more than forty 
years. 

Ansel Bourne was a carpenter by occupation, 
and an atheist. After an attack of psychical or 
hysterical blindness, on regaining his sight under 



52 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

peculiar religious conditions, he became an evan- 
gelist. Subsequently, suddenly, and without any 
obvious cause a change of personality occurred: 
his whole former life disappeared from his con- 
sciousness, and a different consciousness with 
its entirely different memories, tastes, and occu- 
pation took its place. He was away from home 
at the moment of this change, and at once his 
whole thought and course of action and life 
changed accordingly. He straightway left the 
scenes of his former life in Rhode Island, and 
under the name of A. J. Brown went to a small 
town a few miles from Philadelphia, engaged in 
an entirely new business, which he carried on suc- 
cessfully and in a normal way for six weeks, and 
then suddenly resumed his primary consciousness. 
He then had no remembrance of what had oc- 
curred during the six weeks that he had been 
absent from home. 

In the case of Alma Z. the different states were 
equally distinct, alternated frequently, but at 
length, with the re-establishment of health, the 
primary personality returned to a perfectly normal 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 55 

and stable condition. These cases, though fully 
described elsewhere, are briefly outlined here be- 
cause they are specially distinct examples of the 
sudden occurrence — without any apparent exter- 
nal cause — of a second personality, remaining for 
considerable periods of time, perfectly normal, 
with a full appreciation of surroundings, condi- 
tions, and duties — in a word, a perfectly sane and 
conscious personality absolutely distinct from the 
primary or usual one. 

Seeking other conditions in which the second 
personality is observed, somnambulism at once 
presents itself. It has always been a problem 
and a stumbling-block to the philosophers, for in 
it phenomena occurred which could not be ac- 
counted for on any known principle of mental 
action. It remained a terra incognita, which no 
one claimed to have fully explored. 

The case of the Archbishop of Bordeaux, pub- 
lished in the great French Encyclopedia, remained 
a wonder which no one explained. A young 
ecclesiastic, a pupil of the Archbishop, was in 
the habit of getting up in his sleep during the 



54 HYPMOTISM AMD SUGGESTION. 

night, preparing materials and writing his ser- 
mons; revising and correcting each page as it 
was finished, in the most systematic manner. 
When a piece of cardboard was placed between 
his eye and his work, he still went on writing and 
correcting with the same facility as before. In 
adapting words to music under the same condi- 
tions, the greatest nicety was observed in placing 
each syllable of the words directly under the note 
to which it was to be sung; and if by accident the 
words ran ahead or fell behind the proper notes 
he at once erased them and wrote them anew, 
with perfect adaptation. When awake he had no 
remembrance whatever of his work. 

The following case was communicated by M. 
Badaire, director of the normal school at Guert 
in France. It was approved by the medical officer 
of the school and the whole corps of teachers as 
well as adult pupils, who were also teachers and 
to whom the report was read. It is published in 
the '' Proceedings '' of the S. P. R. Theophile 
Janicaud, a teacher, and pupil at the school, as a 
child was subject to attacks of somnambulism, 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 55 

but for ten years they had entirely ceased. Dur- 
ing the first year at the normal school no attacks 
occurred ; but in the second year of his attendance, 
during an excessively hot period in July, his con- 
dition entirely changed and attacks of somnam- 
bulism occurred nearly every night. Each even- 
ing, after sleeping an hour or two, he got up, 
walked about the dormitory, went to the study 
and worked in the dark, or wandered about the 
grounds, picked flowers, amused himself, and 
finally returned to bed. Sometimes these noc- 
turnal excursions were carried on in most unusual 
and dangerous places, so that it became neces- 
sary to secure him by wristlets and chains; but 
even these were often insufficient, and his in- 
genuity in freeing himself was remarkable; on 
one occasion with a pocket knife he cut off a por- 
tion of a window sash, and from it fashioned a 
key with which he easily undid the padlock which 
confined him. 

One night about eleven o'clock Janicaud, 
having escaped from his dormitory, knocked at 
M. Badaire's bedroom door. (The parents of M. 



56 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

Badaire's wife were living at Vendome, and her 
little son was with them.) " I have just arrived 
from Vendome," said Janicaud, " and I have 
come to give you news of your family. M. and 
Mme. Arnault are well, and your little son has 
four teeth." *' As you have seen them at Ven- 
dome," said M. Badaire, " perhaps you could go 
back again and tell me where they are now." 
" Wait," said he, — " I am there — they are sleep- 
ing in a room on the first floor; their bed is at the 
further end of the room, to the left. The nurse's 
bed is to the right, and Henry's cradle is close 
to it." 

M. Badaire remarks : " The description of the 
room and position of the beds was perfectly cor- 
rect, and the following day I received a letter 
from my father-in-law, telling me that my little 
son had cut his fourth tooth." 

One night Janicaud suddenly jumped up in 
bed, and, turning to one of his companions, ex- 
claimed : " See, Roulet, how careless you are ! I 
told you to surely shut the door of the book-bind- 
ing workshop, but you did not do it, and a cat 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 57' 

in eating the paste has just knocked over the dish, 
and it is broken into five pieces." Immediate in- 
spection showed that what the somnambulist had 
said was perfectly true. Numerous instances of 
his action while in the somnambulic condition are 
cited — facility in conversation, excellence in com- 
position, and unusual rapidity in writing — all far 
exceeding his ability in his waking hours. He 
had not the slightest remembrance of any of these 
things when in his normal condition, but in his 
somnambulic condition they were all remembered 
in their proper order. 

Here again we have the second personality ap- 
pearing and active in ordinary sleep. The phe- 
nomena in all these cases are similar and the 
analogy between the two sets of cases complete: 
first, the ordinary consciousness is in abeyance or 
is temporarily blotted out; second, another per- 
sonality takes its place and controls the whole 
organism; third, the different occasions upon 
which the somnambulist, as well as the other alter- 
nating personalities, assumes the second condition 
are linked together in each case in a new and en- 



58 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

tirely different chain of memories, constituting a 
personality just as consciously and really distinct 
and characteristic as the primary or ordinary per- 
sonality. 

Looking for still other states in which the sub- 
conscious mind gives evidence of its presence and 
activity, we find the hypnotic condition in some of 
its stages affording excellent examples. And 
here we come into the field of experiment and 
demonstration. 

Referring again to the case of Ansel Bourne: 
when his primary consciousness returned he 
found himself in a strange place and among 
people who were total strangers to him. Of the 
time and occupation of the previous six weeks 
he was entirely oblivious, and in this condition he 
returned to his home in Rhode Island. Here he 
was interviewed by Professor William James 
and Dr. Hodgson, Secretary of ^le American 
Branch of the Society for Psychical Research, 
and was afterwards hypnotised by them. When 
in the hypnotic condition he was again A. J. 
Brown, with A. J. Brown's sentiments and 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 59 

memories, able to describe minutely all the stages 
of his journey frorn Providence to Boston, 
New York, Philadelphia, and Norristown, and 
the particulars of his business there; all of which 
on investigation proved to be correct. In other 
words, by means of hypnotism his second person- 
ality was again brought to the front, and was at 
once recognised as the same personality which 
had been present during his strange experience 
at Norristown. Aroused from the hypnotic con- 
dition he was at once Ansel Bourne again with all 
his usual knowledge, associations, and train of 
memories. 

The same thing is true of the somnambulist. 
If he be hypnotised, the condition which he enters 
is generally the same as his usual somnambulic 
state, and forms a link in the chain of memories 
which constitutes a personality like those already 
described. 

One of the rnost striking changes which ac- 
company this alternation of personality is that 
which often occurs in the physical condition of the 
patient, whether the alternation takes place spon- 



6q hypnotism and SUGGESTION. 

taneously or is brought about by hypnotism. 
This change in FeHda X. has been noted. Alma 
Z. in her primary state could take scarcely any 
food and was correspondingly debilitated, but the 
second personality was strong and could eat 
freely. Of this change in personality and at the 
same time in physical condition brought about by 
hypnotism M. Janet's patient, Marceline R., fur- 
nishes an excellent example. This patient had 
been subject to a series of hysterical troubles of a 
persistent character, which at length culminated 
in a most insuperable form of nausea. Food of 
every description was immediately ejected, and 
even the sight of food produced most distressing 
spasms of retching. Artificial feeding was only 
partially successful, and at length she was reduced 
to such a state of emaciation that her death from 
starvation seemed imminent. At this crisis M. 
Janet was asked to see the patient and hypnotise 
her. He was at once successful; and the second 
personality present in the hypnotic condition was 
able to take and digest food with perfect comfort. 
As soon as she was brought out of her hypnotic 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY -AND LUCIDITY. 6i 

State all her discomfort. and inability to take food 
again appeared, and with it the consequent dan- 
gerous inanition. Under these circumstances the 
only course possible to save her life was to let 
the hypnotic condition continue; this was accord- 
ingly done for months at a time, with comfort and 
apparent happiness to the patient. Each time, on 
being recalled from her second condition, the old 
trouble returned and it was necessary to re- 
hypnotise her and bring about her more healthful 
and apparently more normal condition of life. 
During this control of the second personality 
brought about by hypnotism she occupied herself 
usefully, and successfully passed her written ex- 
amination for hospital nurse — something she had 
failed to do in her ordinary condition. This 
patient is still living most of the time in the 
second condition, with occasional unsuccessful at- 
tempts to make her comfortable for short periods 
in her primary state. 

Krafft-Ebing's well-known case, lima S., might 
also be cited as one of a second personality in a 
hysterio-epileptic. In this case the second con- 



62 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

dition appeared sometimes spontaneously, some- 
times apparently self-induced, and was often 
brought about by means of hypnotism; this 
latter means being used for experimentation, and, 
as it seems to me, to a most unwarrantable degree. 

We find then a certain definite series of phe- 
nomena presenting themselves under three dis- 
tinct conditions : 

(i) A change from the ordinary or primary 
condition to a second and entirely different one, 
brought about by illness or other physical causes. 

(2) The same change of condition occurring 
in ordinary sleep, and known as sleep-walking or 
somnambulism. 

(3) The same changes brought about experi- 
mentally by means of hypnotism, as in the case 
of Ansel Bourne and Marceline R. 

Of each of the three conditions under which 
this change occurs I have had well-marked ex- 
amples under my own observation, and I have 
carefully examined the literature of other reported 
cases, and they all present the same essential char- 
acteristics. The cases are now too numerous an4 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 6t, 

the phenomena exhibited are too distinct and in 
too perfect agreement to allow of reasonable 
doubt regarding the facts themselves, or of their 
identity under all these different circumstances. 
The phenomena which are present in each case 
are such as to indicate the appearance of a new 
and independent personality. The thoughts, 
actions, feelings, opinions, and even the facial ex- 
pression and essential character of the second per- 
sonality are utterly different from those of the 
primary self. The statement of all* these second 
personalities themselves, so far as it goes, cor- 
roborates the same inference. The primary per- 
sonality knows nothing of the second or succeed- 
ing ones. The second personality in every case 
declares its absolute independence, is anxious not 
to be confounded with the primary self, and gives 
good and substantial reasons for that desire. 

Krafft-Ebing, however, in saying that these 
different states of consciousness have '' absolutely 
nothing in common," promulgates an error; for, 
while the primary personality has no knowledge 
whatever of the second, nor of any succeeding 



64 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

personality, the second personality has always a 
more or less intimate knowledge of the primary 
self, but only as another and entirely distinct per- 
son. Again, the second personality, while hav- 
ing knowledge of the primary self, has no knowl- 
edge of any third, nor of any subsequent one; so 
also the third knows number one and number 
two, but nothing of number four, should such 
a personality appear. 

Such in brief outline being the facts, what is 
the theory which best co-ordinates them? 

I am fully aware of the infinite scorn with 
whicli the strict school of physiologic psycholo- 
gists look upon experimental psychology, and 
upon any theory in psychology which is not based 
in physiology; but when Carpenter, the early 
apostle of that school, could offer no better 
theory to explain a coherent message, automatic- 
ally spoken or written, thafi " unconscious cere- 
bration " and " unconscious muscular action," and 
when Wundt, its latest expositor, teaches that the 
usual cause of dreams is indigestion, that sleep- 
walking, like dreaming, " has no mystery about 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 65 

it," that ''the popular beHef in premonitions by 
dreams we need not stop to consider," and that 
" such superstitions as telepathy and clairvoyance 
are not even open questions," we know that, how- 
ever scientific and however honest these teachers 
may suppose themselves to be, we are seeking 
explanations from men who accept or reject facts 
according to the influence they may have upon 
their own theories, and that they are useless as 
guides in this region, because they have never 
themselves traversed it. 

Nevertheless, numerous praiseworthy attempts 
have been made to explain upon purely anatomical 
and physiological grounds the appearance and 
significance of this now generally accredited 
second personality. Heidenhain's somewhat 
crude attempt to explain the condition of hyp- 
nosis by " inhibition " was among the first of the 
really rational theories, and Dr. Morton Prince's 
" Contribution to the Study of Hysteria and Hyp- 
nosis," in Part xxxiv. of the '' Proceedings " 
of the S. P. R., is one of the most pertinent and 
valuable studies in this direction. Recent studies 



66 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

relating to the neurons and their projections may 
also eventually be utilised; but the original fur- 
row, bringing to the surface soil which when 
properly sown and cultivated must prove spe- 
cially fruitful, is Hughlings-Jackson's anatomical 
scheme adopted by Dr. Prince, separating the 
cerebro-spinal system into three distinct " levels," 
in the order of their development in the ascend- 
ing series of vertebrate animals. 

The first, or lowest, level includes the spinal 
cord and the medulla, together with the com- 
mencement of the brain as far as, and including, 
the origin of the cranial nerves. 

The second, or middle, level comprises the 
middle portion of the brain, where the ganglia of 
the special senses are situated and the impulse to 
motion chiefly arises — the chief sensori-motor 
region. The third, or highest, level includes the 
frontal lobes, together with some portion of the 
sensori-motor region along their border. Physio- 
logically also, in harmony with the order of devel- 
opment, the lower level presides over reflex and 
automatic movements, excited mainly by the 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 67 

tactile sense and few and imperfectly developed 
special senses ; the middle level, while taking cog- 
nisance of what is below, presides over what 
might be represented by instinctive movements, 
in prompt response to acute and highly developed 
special senses; while the highest level, in addition 
to its influence upon all below itself, rules the 
movements that are the result of conscious 
thought and ideation. 

Dr. Prince goes on to say : '' First, the highest 
level requires and is entirely dependent upon the 
second level for all intercourse with the external 
world; that consciousness which we call self sees 
and feels only through the consciousness of the 
middle level, and also acts only through this 
level. . . The middle level would therefore 
know a good deal of the conscious life of the 
highest level. 

'' Second, as the second level feels and acts di- 
rectly without any intervention of the highest 
level, when acting automatically it would receive 
a great many impressions and do a great many 
things of which the hig-hest level was unconscious; 



68 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

that is, the conscious Ufe of the second level would 
not always enter into that group of mental 
states which we call personal consciousness. 
If, further, all the highest centres were removed 
or their power to function was suppressed, then 
consciousness would be limited to the activity of 
the middle level, and would constitute a second 
personality." 

Here at all events is a clear and consistent at- 
tempt to explain the psychic activity which is 
known as the subconscious mind upon anatomical 
and physiological grounds. It is undoubtedly 
sound and must form the basis of any advance 
hereafter made in this direction. It does not 
assume to be complete, and the whole subject will 
still need long continued observation and study, 
for certain important clinical facts remain un- 
explained. For example; in certain cases at least, 
not only the perceptive faculties, which may be 
supposed to have their highest exercise in the 
middle level of the^brain, the working ground of 
the special senses, but also the intellectual facul- 
ties, which are supposed to have their highest 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 69 

exercise in the frontal lobes, are stimulated to a 
higher activity while in a condition of hypnosis, 
which, according to the theory, is a condition of 
inhibition, than when in their normal state. The 
allied condition of ordinary somnambulism pre- 
sents a long list of examples bearing upon this 
subject. Janicaud was a much better conversa- 
tionalist in somnambulism than when awake, was 
much more critical regarding language used in 
his presence, could write a much better letter or 
literary exercise, and with astonishing rapidity. 

The following incident is told of the Rev. Dr. 
J. M., a very well known and popular preacher 
in New York city, fifty years ago. He and the 
Rev. Mr. B. were oh a certain occasion travelling 
companions, and at night they occupied the same 
room. During the night Mr. B. heard the good 
Doctor speaking in his sleep. He took his text — 
rather an unusual one — and proceeded to dis- 
course upon it in a very ingenious and eloquent 
manner, making some very original and telling 
points. At the breakfast table the next morning 
Mr. B. remarked that he had been thinking of a 



76 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

certain text — naming the one the Doctor had 
made use of during the night — and that he 
thought of treating it so and so — mentioning the 
same method and making the same telling points 
•that the Doctor had made in his nocturnal dis- 
course. The Doctor was delighted; he declared 
it was wonderfully clever — a real stroke of genius 
— and desired to know how such an unusual treat- 
ment had ever come into his companion's mind. 
Mr. B. then told him of his discourse during the 
previous night and that the excellent points had 
all been made by him during his sleep. 

Cases illustrating increased intellectual ability 
during somnambulism ar^ so numerous, and so ' 
thoroughly authenticated, that it is quite astonish- 
ing to hear eminent authorities in psychology de- 
clare that the related incidents of this kind are 
baseless and unworthy of belief. 

The same stimulation of the intellect is observ- 
able in the condition of hypnosis artificially pro- 
duced. Marceline R., as before noted, passed 
her written examination for hospital nurse in a 
condition of second personality induced by hyp- 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. >jt 

notism, though she was unable to do so in 
her normal condition. One of the most impor- 
tant uses of hypnotism is its tendency to clear 
and elevate the intellectual and moral faculties 
and qualities, and re-enforced by suggestion 
it becomes an efficient aid in the education of 
children who are dull, and even in cases where 
there is <ieficiency in intellectual capacity. It 
would hardly seem possible that this could be 
true if inhibition of the frontal lobes was the 
physical condition essential to hypnosis or the 
induction of the second personality. 

That increased acuteness of perception should 
be present in the second personality, up to the 
limit of physiological possibility, is quite consist- 
ent with the above theory, which predicates in- 
creased activity of the sensori-motor tract, or 
middle level of the brain, but whether it will ac- 
count for the facts as they actually exist remains 
an open question. 

Some of the more important of these facts re- 
late to veridical or truth-telling dreams, super- 
normal visual perception or clairvoyance, either 



72 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

sleeping or waking, and impressions — ^visual, au- 
ditory, or tactile — experienced most frequently in 
the border land between sleeping and waking. 
The facts illustrating these conditions are too 
numerous to be presented here. One or two in- 
stances must suffice. 

Mr. Donald Murray, a gentleman connected 
with the Sydney Morning Herald, sends the fol- 
lowing case of a veridical dream to Dr. Hodgson, 
one of the secretaries of the S. P. R., of which 
Mr. Murray is also a member. All the persons 
concerned resided in Sydney, and Mr. Murray 
took the greatest pains to substantiate and verify 
every important point. 

The Atacama, a wooden vessel not first-class, 
sailed from Sydney, New South Wales, for 
San Diego, Cal., on January 29th, 1898, with a 
cargo of coal. When eight days out they found 
the ship leaking badly, with considerable water 
already in the well, and a rapidly falling barom- 
eter; they decided to return to port, and accord- 
ingly steered for Sydney. On Wednesday, Feb- 
ruary 9th, the weather was heavy and the water 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 73 

gained so rapidly that it was found necessary to 
abandon the ship three hundred miles from land 
— which they did — all taking to the boats at six 
o'clock on Wednesday evening. They stayed by 
the ship all night or until she went down, and then 
made the best course they could for Sydney. The 
first boat was a 24-foot lifeboat containing the 
master (Captain Spruit), the boatswain, steward, 
an able seaman, and an apprentice boy sixteen 
years of age. The rest of the crew, twelve in num- 
ber, were in two other boats. On Saturday, Feb- 
ruary 1 2th, the wind increased to a hurricane — 
the captain's boat was swamped and capsized and 
the boy, Allen, was drowned. The boat righted 
and the captain, who could not swim, and the 
remainder of the crew scrambled on board and 
spent the night in the boat filled with water and 
in a hurricane. The next day was still a furious 
gale and Captain Spruit was washed overboard, 
but was rescued by one of the men. Monday, the 
14th, the same conditions; on the 15th and i6th 
there was improvement in the weather, and the 
boat was baled out. February i6th they were 



74 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

rescued by the ship Industrie, which ship was also 
badly damaged by the hurricane — and they were 
finally taken off by a tugboat, thirty-five miles 
from Sydney, and brought into port. They 
were in the last stages of exhaustion from fa- 
tigue, watching, entire lack of food, water, and 
sleep. 

Their arrival caused a great sensation in Syd- 
ney, and the newspapers were full of particulars 
of the disaster gleaned from the survivors. 

Captain Spruit's family resided at Balmain, a 
suburb of Sydney. On Thursday morning about 
three o'clock — the same morning that the ship 
went down — his daughter Lily, thirteen years of 
age, came to her mother's room crying, awakened 
her mother and said : " Oh, Mamma, I am so 
frightened." Her mother asked her what was the 
matter. " Oh, see ! " she said. " Dada's ship is 
wrecked; Dada has come home all in rags; his 
feet and legs are all cut, and one or two of his 
men are drowned out of his boat." 

The mother tried to make light of it and of 
her fears, but the child could think of nothing 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 75 

but her dream, and could not go to school that 
day — Thursday — on account of her excitement 
and agitation. The same feeling continued with 
more or less intensity tlirough the week until her 
father came home. Coming from school that 
day she found her mother crying, and immedi- 
ately asked: "Oh, Mamma; is the Atacama 
wrecked ? " When told that it was, and that her 
father had come home, she asked, " Are Dada's 
legs cut ? " When she first saw her father she 
exclaimed: *' You didn't have those clothes on; 
the clothes you had on were all torn when I 
dreamed about the shipwreck." 

Later, in answer to questions, she said : " I 
thought I saw my father get into the boat; that 
they put everything into the boat that they could 
and they kept close up to the ship, and afterwards 
it went down. My father was in the boat and 
the boy, and the boatswain, and two or three 
others I did not know. I saw the boat go over, 
and the boy was drowned. I saw them pull my 
father into the boat; and my father came home 
all cut about the legs, and he had lost everything. 



76 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

The night was stormy and I heard the wind howl- 
ing. 

Here the dream corresponded in time to the 
beginning of the tragedy which lasted a whole 
week; but it all, present and future, seemed to 
pass like a panorama before the vision of the 
dreamer. 

Cases like the one just cited are numerous and 
they show certain powers of the subconscious 
mind active and enlarged during sleep; the result 
we call veridical dreams. We have seen the 
same subconscious mind at work in ordinary som- 
nambulism, also with greatly increased and 
peculiar perceptive powers — and instances of this 
condition are also abundant in which the display 
of the intellectual as well as perceptive faculties 
has far exceeded that of the primary condition or 
self. The same is true of the second self in- 
duced by hypnotism, and cases illustrating that 
fact or condition have been given here and also 
in my former volume. Hundreds more could be 
added. The following is of interest on account of 
its simplicity — appearing, as it did, most unex- 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 77 

pectedly among perfectly unsophisticated rural 
people. It illustrates the identity of the self- 
induced trance condition and the trance induced 
by hypnotism, and also the enlargement of 
powers, physical and mental as well as perceptive, 
which may be observed alike in both. 

Ira Healy lived in the town of Hampton Falls, 
N. H. At the age of twenty he was a poor, 
illiterate farm hand; of good health, but men- 
tally dull to a degree bordering on stupidity. 
His home was with a farmer, Rufus Sanborn, a 
man of most staunch and upright character, whose 
word was unimpeachable. By some means it 
was discovered that Ira could be mesmerised, and 
that Sanborn could very readily place him in the 
mesmeric, or as we would say, the hypnotic sleep 
— a single word or a pass being sufficient — and 
later the subject could himself induce the same 
condition at will. When in this condition, how- 
ever induced, all his faculties seemed to be en- 
larged and brightened — but especially his faculty 
of perception; and this was made evident under 
conditions where the ordinary senses could render 



78 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

him no help. Both the subject and mesmeriser 
are now dead, but Mr. W. A. Cram, who reports 
the case to Dr. Hodgson for pubhcation in the 
Journal of the S. P. R., was twelve years old at 
the time, and in addition to his own boyish recol- 
lection of the circumstances he has the statement 
of Miss Mary A. Sanborn, the sister of the hyp- 
notiser, who was perfectly familiar with all the 
incidents, and Mr. Dean R. Tilton, an intelligent 
man, and next-door neighbour to the Sanborns, 
and who often worked with Ira and Mr. Sanborn. 
He also had the recollections of his father, 
brother, and several other persons who knew the 
facts. On going into the sleep, whether self-in- 
duced or produced by hypnotism, Ira became 
another personality. In his normal state he had 
less than the ordinary strength of a man, but in 
his second condition his strength was increased 
manifold; stones or other heavy objects, which 
three or four men could hardly move, were lifted 
by him while in his trance condition with the ut- 
most ease. Ordinarily he had very little control 
over the horses or oxen in use on the farm and 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 79 

was always in trouble whenever he tried to 
manage them, but in his hypnotic condition he 
managed them with perfect ease. Mr. Tilton 
gives the following incident : He was in the field 
one day where Sanborn was sowing grain; at the 
further end of the field Ira was driving the horse 
to harrow it in. Soon they noticed that Ira was 
in great trouble; he had lost all control of the 
horse and was utterly unable to manage him. 
Mr. Tilton goes on to say: " Rufus [Mr. San- 
born] immediately made two or three passes to- 
ward Ira, who was not looking toward us, and at 
once he straightened up as with the energy of half 
a dozen horse-trainers, subdued the horse, and 
drove him without difficulty till the work was 
finished." 

But it was in his marvellous power of seeing 
that Ira was most interesting. " On the farm 
where he lived he w^ould be assigned to the work 
of dropping corn while hypnotised, but so com- 
pletely blindfolded that by no possibility could he 
see by means of ordinary vision; thus blindfolded, 
he would drop the corn into the hills with careful 



So HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

exactness. It was soon discovered that he did 
his work better in this state than in his natural 
condition of seeing. To test his superior vision 
still further, a number of hills here and there 
throughout the corn-row would be dropped and 
carefully covered without his knowledge, so as 
to appear to common sight as if not planted at all. 
Set to drop the corn in such a row, he never failed 
to see the corn in the planted hills through an 
inch or two of soil covering, and so passed them. 
He said he saw the corn all the same whether 
covered or uncovered, and all the while perfectly 
blindfolded. Questioned how he saw, he could 
not tell. 

" Again, while Ira was in one room, and some 
person in ah adjoining room, with no opening 
between, would hold up a closed book in his hand, 
the subject, being asked to read on a certain page 
named, would begin and slowly read; on turning 
to the page designated, it would be found that he 
had read what was there printed. Often in such 
experiments he was also blindfolded, thus plainly 
seeing through thick folds of cloth, the walls 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY, 8i 

dividing the rooms, and the cover and leaves of 
the book. 

*' He was also able to see clearly at a distance. 
While in the hypnotic state he would be asked 
to look over into a neighbouring village and 
into a certain house, some three miles away, 
and tell what he saw. He would at once begin 
and describe the room, the furniture and objects 
in it, then the dress and acts of the people in 
the room, even to minute circumstances and de- 
tail, at times laughing over some strange or 
amusing thing which he saw. It would be found 
afterwards, on careful inquiry, that he saw and 
gave accurate accounts of the room, objects, and 
people at the specified time." 

Mr. Tilton also gives the following account: 
" I went one day with the operator to Exeter to 
visit Commodore Long, who wanted to see Ira 
v»rhen mesmerised. Among many other things 
the Commodore had a big Chinese book full of 
pictures. This was given to Ira. He took it 
on his lap, closed, did not open it, but commenced 
to look through, admire, and describe the pictures. 



82 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

We opened the book many times and found he 
had described them very accurately. 

'' The operator knew nothing of the book; the 
subject was bhndfolded all the time with two 
folded handkerchiefs, one over each eye and a 
third drawn around the head over the eyes to hold 
the folded ones in place. 

^' Mrs. Long came up to Ira holding out her 
hand closed — back of the hand up. She asked 
Ira what was in it. He said, ' watch.' It was 
a small gold hunting-case one. She then asked 
him to tell the time through her hand. He imme- 
diately put the side of his forehead to the back of 
her hand and stated the time. No one in the 
room knew the time it marked. On opening the 
watch, it was found that he had named exactly 
the hour and minute." 

Miss Sanborn, sister of the operator, lived in 
the house at the time of these mesmeric experi- 
ments. She says that the subject's eyes were al- 
ways closed when in the " sleep," and on exami- 
nation the eyeballs were found turned up so that 
only ''the white" was visible. When in this 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 83 

State he used to read and look at pictures a great 
deal, talked and sometimes laughed immoderately 
— his eyes tightly closed, holding the book or 
paper close to the upper part of his forehead. 

This lady also says that sometimes she would 
be left alone with the subject, her mother being 
away. Ira would go and sit in the chair usually 
occupied by her brother, saying, " Now I am 
going to sleep ten minutes." Passing into the 
"state " he would at times seem to be possessed 
with a dozen rollicking spirits, laughing, talking, 
and playing pranks, but always waking up at the 
precise moment mentioned before entering the 
sleep, and knowing nothing at all of what had 
passed while in his hypnotic trance. She also 
says that the operator had no power to draw him 
out of the self -induced states. 

She adds that he often ate at table while in his 
mesmeric condition; with eyes tightly closed, yet 
plainly seeing as well or better than others. 

This case seems a fair parallel to that of Alexis 
Didier, the French clairvoyant, some fifty years 
ago. Robert Houdin, the noted conjurer of the 



84 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

same period, had two private sittings with Alexis, 
and when asked : " Well, what about jugglery? " 
replied : " Monsieur, if the world contains a jug- 
gler capable of performing such miracles, he 
would, as a juggler, astonish me a thousand times 
more than the mysterious agent whom you have 
just shown me." And again, after a second sit- 
ting, he said : " This seance has left me without 
a shadow of a doubt as to the clairvoyance of 
Alexis." 

Doubtless much more could have been accom- 
plished with a subject like Ira Healy by an 
operator who knew the possibilities in such a case. 

Several of the cases here presented, and many 
which might be presented, give abundant evidence 
of supernormal power of perception, especially 
of seeing, equivalent to what is known as clair- 
voyance. Telepathy, or thought transference, is 
also represented. All these unusual faculties, as 
attributes of the human mind in any of its phases, 
remain unrecognised, or at least unacknowledged, 
by science. It is only now that science is even be- 
ginning to consider them seriously; but it is be- 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 85 

ginning so to consider them; many thoroughly 
scientific men are already convinced of their 
reality, and it is because of a knowledge of the 
subconscious mind that such recognition is to 
some extent given. In the meantime hypnotism 
has come to be regarded with favour by psycholo- 
gists and to be known as the instrument by which 
this psychic analysis has been accomplished, and 
the subconscious mind brought to the light so that 
its peculiar functions and faculties can be intelli- 
gently studied. 

The conditions under which the subconscious 
mind, or subliminal self, has been observed may 
be conveniently classified as follows: 

(i) There are the cases of distinctly alternat- 
ing personalities in which the change from one to 
the other occurs suddenly and spontaneously and 
a new personality comes upon the scene, entirely 
sane, with perfect knowledge of, and in perfect 
harmony with, its environments; continuing not 
only for hours, but for months and even years, 
performing the duties of life in a wholly normal, 
useful, and exemplary manner, sometimes — as in 



S6 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

Dr. Azam's case, Felida X. — much better than 
the original self could do. 

(2) There is the very large class of cases in 
which the second personality, or subliminal self, is 
brought to the surface by means of hypnotism. 
Of this class Professor Janet's case of Madame 
B., Krafft-Ebing's lima S., Dr. Dufay's case of 
** Marie," and my own case of " Miss A." are 
marked and typical examples; and to this list 
doubtless every physician who has had experience 
in hypnotising could contribute one or more cases. 

(3) There are the startling phenomena which 
occur in ordinary sleep, namely, somnambulism 
and veridical dreams. 

(4) There is the large class of changes in per- 
sonality as well as intelligence brought about by 
recognised pathologic conditions of the organism. 

Beside these classes, there is the whole series of 
automatic actions, — automatic speaking, writing, 
and drawing, — also hallucinations of hearing 
voices and seeing visions; all of which belong to 
the varied action and influence of the subliminal 
self. 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 67 

On the philosophical side it is unnecessary to 
fully discuss here the problems which arise with 
reference to the nature of consciousness, together 
with the resulting personality and its varying 
phases, but some idea regarding the nature of per- 
sonality is necessary to the consideration of our 
subject. 

Ribot, in his monograph on the '' Diseases of 
Personality," tells us, regarding this matter, that 
" we are confronted by only two hypotheses" : one 
the old supernatural theory that personality is the 
fundamental property of soul or mind; the other, 
which he calls the new and scientific view, that it 
is *' only the expression of organism." In other 
words, mind is the product of organism ; but when 
the question is asked : " Of what is organism the 
product? " his last word is : " To biology belongs 
the task of explaining, if it can, the genesis of 
organism. Psychologic interpretation can only 
follow in its wake." He points out the necessity 
for a reasonable theory for the genesis of organ- 
ism, but for himself he simply ignores the matter; 
he takes a ready-made organism with its germ of 



8S HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

consciousness and assumes, without the slightest 
proof, that the germ of consciousness is the result 
of the organism. This, plainly stated, is Ribot's 
" very recent theory," and this is the particularly 
scientific method by which it is maintained. 

Let us follow up this author's statements. 

A little further on he says : " It will then be 
time" (after having studied its constituent ele- 
ments), "to compare personality with the lower 
forms through which nature has essayed to pro- 
duce it, and to show that the psychic individual 
is the expression of organism." 

Here a new element, nature, is introduced, and 
it is quite important to understand what is meant 
by it. Is nature active or passive? Ribot says, 
" Nature essays to produce personality through 
lower forms " — and presumably it does so. That 
is activity. Nature, then, is active, whatever else 
it may be; and there must of necessity be an active 
principle in nature which works, which produces 
effects. Now, it matters not what we call that 
power in nature which works for definite ends, as 
Ribot particularly explains, and produces definite 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 89 

results. We may, with the supernaturalists, 
separate it, personify it, call it deity and clothe it 
with attributes, or, with Herbert Spencer, call it 
the unknowable and leave it naked; we may, with 
Matthew Arnold, call it the " power which makes 
for righteousness," or, with Schopenhauer, con- 
sider it the power which makes for evil ; by what- 
ever name we please to call it, it is still the power 
which works; and it is with this power in nature 
that Ribot and his school must reckon, and not 
with the " very old " theory of supernaturalism. 
As regards the presence and action of the sub- 
conscious mind as we now observe it in man, and 
which forms so important ah element in person- 
ality, two views may be entertained: it may be 
considered simply as a stratum of consciousness 
shut off from the ordinary, primary conscious- 
ness, but similar in nature and function, with per- 
haps some increased perceptive power, or it may 
be viewed, more truly as it seems to me, as a 
higher development of the cosmic mind or soul 
so evident in nature, even before the perfected 
brain and the full establishment of the reasoning 



90 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

faculties in man. In its inception it was the 
psychic quality belonging to the lowest organ- 
isms, in plants and animals; and its office was 
simply to carry on the processes of organic life in 
the individual in the then existing races, and to 
insure their perpetuity by reproduction; at the 
same time it manifested a peculiar and subtle har- 
mony and rapport with nature and the external 
world — a harmony and rapport the extent and 
beauty of which are little understood or appre- 
ciated. Later this cosmic soul rose to a higher 
plane and expressed itself in higher activities, as, 
for instance, in the instinct in animals — cell-build- 
ing and hive economics in bees, and the homing 
instinct — especially in the domestic animals. 
Again, in harmony with general psychic develop- 
ment, it rose to a still higher plane, expressing 
itself under favouring circumstances in the 
psychic constitution in man as seership, inspira- 
tion, and genius ; but all the way along its upward 
course still maintaining its primitive office of 
carrying on vital processes, maintaining organic 
life, pushing forward evolution to higher forms, 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 91 

and presiding over all automatic activities. It is 
the substratum upon which knowledge and the 
reasoning faculties are based, becomes closely- 
associated with these faculties, and in turn is in- 
fluenced by them. It is therefore broad in its 
activities, including the simple functions of 
organic life and also some of the loftiest and 
most beautiful activities of the whole human 
mind. 

We have then to deal with personality as some- 
thing more than the evanescent exhibition of con- 
sciousness, a mere function of organism; it has a 
basis and quality drawn from the reservoir of 
power which is in nature, power that was before 
organism and was that by which and for which 
organism came into being; to argue otherwise is 
to reverse cause and effect, and make the greater 
subservient to the less. 

We have seen how this personality in its vari- 
ous manifestations is recognised by many com- 
petent writers; we have also seen how promptly 
this deeply buried portion of our personality 
comes to the surface and manifests itself as dis- 



92 HVPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

tinct and capable of independent action, and under 
what circumstances this occurs. 

How did these various phases of our person- 
ality, so distinct and different, claiming for them- 
selves separate existences and names, come to 
exist, and why do they manifest themselves at all ? 
As Ribot would explain personality by a single 
word, habit, so I, perhaps with more obvious pro- 
priety, might explain the appearance of a second 
personality with the single word atavism. 

It is a well-recognised fact that certain clearly 
defined traits or characteristics, either physical or 
mental, existing in ancestors, near or remote, may, 
after passing by one or more generations, at 
length crop out distinctly and unmistakably in a 
later one. Physical peculiarities or deformities, 
tendency to certain diseases, or peculiar mental 
characteristics are frequently in this manner 
transposed; also a peculiar insight or genius for 
certain pursuits, as, for instance, hunting and 
frontier life, a military career, mathematics, 
music, acting, or scientific pursuits, existing in a 
marked degree in some near or remote ancestor, 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 93 

may, indeed, be inherited directly in the succeed- 
ing generation, but, on the other hand, it may 
pass over one or more generations to appear in 
ah unmistakable manner in a later one. 

While the principle of atavism has not been 
demonstrated in the case of second personality ap- 
pearing under any of the circumstances hereto- 
fore enumerated, it is at least worthy of careful 
consideration in that connection. 

Suppose, for instance, that five generations 
back there appeared a man of marked and thor- 
oughly bad characteristics married to a right- 
minded, moral, even religious woman; that he 
was a vilifier of morality and religion, profane 
and vicious in life and unscrupulous in his deal- 
ings with others; that the generations which im- 
mediately succeeded him came under influences 
which, aided by inherited characteristics from the 
mother, led to lives of morality, uprightness, or 
even conspicuous piety. In the fifth generation, 
however, appeared a man who in the midst of 
these moral and religious environments was con- 
spicuous for his profanity, vicious life, and un- 



94 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

scrupulous conduct, so identical with his remote 
ancestor as to make the connection undoubted. 
Where did this evil tendency exist during the four 
intervening generations? Let us tap the main 
line between the two extreme points and see what 
information may be extracted. In the fourth 
generation was a mild, religiously inclined 
woman, but of unsound health and perhaps of 
unstable personality. From some sudden shock 
syncope, or loss of consciousness, occurs and, as in 
the case of Felida X., on recovery an entirely new 
and differeiit personality is found to have taken 
the place of the original one. It professes to be a 
man, and to the horror and consternation of the 
good people surrounding her, she commences to 
curse, to vilify everything good, and upholds sen- 
timents and practices of the most offensive and 
criminal character. This person has a chain of 
memories and a personal history entirely foreign 
and unknown to the primary self, but quite con- 
sistent with those of the remote ancestor whom 
we have considered. In an hour or a day the 
primary consciousness has returned, but there is 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 95 

not the slightest knowledge or recollection of the 
character which she has represented in her second 
personality, and very likely the case is diagnosed 
as temporary insanity; in a more primitive age it 
would have been called possession by an evil spirit. 
It was, in reality, the strongly impressed charac- 
teristics of a distinct personality which had lain 
dormant for three generations, now coming to the 
surface temporarily, under favouring circum- 
stances, in the fourth. In another generation it 
actually appeared, an atavism^ as the primary and 
usual personality. In like manner a personality 
of conspicuous goodness or conspicuous talent 
might pass over many generations of mediocrity 
or of evildoers, and appear, a pleasant atavism, 
after one or many generations had intervened. 
Less extreme personalities might be formed in like 
manner, and more than one might be impressed 
upon individuals in successive generations, giving 
rise to the perplexing and much-debated condi- 
tion of multiplex personalities. Krafft-Ebing 
found in his patient " three psychical existences " 
or personalities. Professor Janet's patient, 



96 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

Mme B., possessed three widely differing ones; 
while one of my own cases presented three 
and another two, alternating spontaneously at 
longer or shorter intervals; not including the 
cases in which changes of personality were 
brought about by hypnotism. 

With this view of the origin and nature of or- 
dinary as well as alternating personalities, it will 
at once be seen that there is an important medico- 
legal aspect from which these cases must be 
viewed. It is evident, first, that the primary self 
must not be held responsible for actions, either 
good or bad, committed by the second or any suc- 
ceeding personality, since it is absolutely ignorant 
of the doings or even of the existence of these 
personalities. It would undoubtedly be just to 
restrain the individual from violence or wrong- 
doing, during the presence of the personality com- 
mitting the wrong, but no longer ; and it would be 
abhorrent to all our ideas of justice to take the 
life of or even to severely punish the individual 
whose identity we have been accustomed to asso- 
ciate with the ordinary self, on account of wrong- 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 97 

doing committed by any succeeding personality, 
while the ordinary self was wholly unconscious. 

It would have been manifestly unjust to punish 
Krafft-Ebing's lima S. for theft committed by 
her second personality, and wisely the court so 
held. Again, in judging of the sanity of indi- 
viduals characterised by alternating personalities, 
we must judge each state or personality by itself 
without reference to other states, but must act 
chiefly with reference to the primary self. 

Insanity is the temporary or permanent loss of 
an intelligent comprehension of surroundings and 
relationships to such a degree as to incapacitate 
the affected person for the fulfilment of the duties 
and relations of life, and consequently render 
him a menace to himself and others. In the ap- 
plication of this or any other definition of insanity 
to particular cases, the fact that it is not the indi- 
vidual's primary or ordinary self which is being 
examined should make no difference in the con- 
clusion arrived at; if the action of the second self 
falls outside our accepted definition, then that self 
is sane. Felida X., in her second condition, had 



98 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

even a clearer comprehension of her surroundings 
and her relations to others than when in her pri- 
mary state; and the same may be said of many 
other individual cases of the same kind, but if 
found insane, in disposing of the case reference 
must be had to the fact that it is not the primary 
or usual self that is affected, and that self, when 
present, should not be made to suffer. 

The same rule is applicable in judging of in- 
sanity or crime appertaining to persons whose 
actions are automatic, even though consciousness 
is retained, as is frequently the case with those 
who have the faculty of automatic writing, speak- 
ing, and other automatic actions carried on by the 
subliminal self; the ability of the subliminal self to 
influence the action of the primary self, as pre- 
viously shown, must be taken into account and 
the degree of responsibility judged of accordingly. 

Professional experts, by opinions given in 
courts of justice, often virtually decide questions 
of liberty and even of life; but he who gives such 
opinions without taking into account the possible 
influence and power of automatism and the sub- 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. 99 

liminal self, assumes a responsibility which bet- 
ter instructed men would consider grave indeed; 
not that cases either of insanity or crime are likely 
often to be brought to notice where these condi- 
tions exist, but the fact that such conditions do 
sometimes exist, and may at any time come up 
for examination, should be known and appre- 
ciated. 

It must be borne in mind that the value of the 
subconscious mind or subliminal self, even when 
brought to the surface and into activity, either 
spontaneously or by means of hypnotism, is far 
from being the same in all persons, any more than 
the value of the intellect and the primary self is 
the same in all. In some the subliminal self 
seems limited to the most ordinary vegetative 
and automatic activities, or it may be diseased, or 
deformed, as manifested in hysteria and perhaps 
in epilepsy, while others, when fully developed, 
in health and under favourable circumstances, 
take in large fields of view both in the physical 
world and in the realm of truth and principles. 

The important role played by this subliminal 

LafC. 



loo HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

consciousness, when in its best estate, in the 
world's progress and development is only begin- 
ning to be considered. Its province is not to rea- 
son, but to see, and to impress what it perceives 
upon the conscious, primary self. Nature is one 
vast storehouse, not only of interesting phe- 
nomena, but also of beautiful underlying prin- 
ciples — principles involved in her own stupendous 
movements and ever varying phases as seen in 
the process of evolution — principles involved in 
all human activities and development — the eco- 
nomic and domestic arts, in science and philos- 
ophy, in religion, in poetry, in music, in art. 

The advanced men and women of all past time, 
the leaders, the discoverers, the people who have 
set milestones along the way of human progress — 
in short, the men of genius — were all intuitional ; 
men whose subconscious minds were in subtle 
communication with nature, with its truth, its 
beauty, its harmony; who were attentive to the 
suggestions which came to them, they knew not 
whence — like Schiller, who, when he wrote, won- 
dered whence his thoughts came, for they flowed 



DOUBLE PERSONALITY AND LUCIDITY. lot 

through him independent of the action of his 
own mind. In the early ages all this was looked 
upon as inspiration coming from some divine ex- 
ternal source; now we are beginning to recognise 
it as coming from within, from that underlying 
consciousness, still perhaps divine, which, accord- 
ing as it is in harmony with Nature and her 
divine principles, is a sharer in her wisdom, her 
truth, and her beauty. 

Such are some of the characteristics and func- 
tions of the subconscious mind, and hypnotism is 
the means by which it has experimentally been 
made known to us; it has proved to be the key 
which unlocks its secret chamber and makes ac- 
cessible its treasures, when treasures exist, or 
makes it amenable to wise and healthful sugges- 
tion when we desire its aid. 

With some distinct thought in mind regarding 
the relation between hypnotism and the subcon- 
scious mind, the work of the hyphotiser will be 
simplified and its efficiency greatly increased. 



CHAPTER III. 

CASES IN GENERAL PRACTICE TREATED BY HYP- 
NOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

In entering upon the more definite and prac- 
tical study of hypnotism it is proper to present 
some cases as they actually occur in general prac- 
tice, illustrating the diversified character of the 
ailments in which hypnotic suggestion is appro- 
priate and effective. 

In presenting these cases, treated by methods 
so unlike those advocated in systematic works 
upon therapeutics, it is by no means proposed to 
substitute hypnotism for other well-accredited 
means of prophylaxis and cure — medical or sur- 
gical — but only to add another curative agent, 
one which has proved itself well worthy of con- 
sideration and which can no longer be looked upon 
as mysterious or unscientific. 

In all investigations claiming to be scientific, 



SOME CASES TREATED. 103 

it is just and necessary to see to it that the facts 
upon which conclusions are based are solid; hyp- 
notism fully meets this necessity; something 
which we agree to call hypnotism exists and pro- 
duces effects, and these effects, perfectly authenti- 
cated as they are, constitute the facts upon which 
it claims consideration and scientific standing. 
It is comparatively new as a subject of honest in- 
vestigation, and questions still remain concern- 
ing its nature and uses — as is also true of every 
new agent. It may not be possible to answer all 
these questions now, nor is that my purpose ; years 
may elapse before that desirable end can be 
reached; but it is only by carefully considering the 
facts as they are observed and reported that an 
approximation to a solution of these problems 
may be made. 

To work effectively, the problems must be 
clearly in mind, and the relation of the facts made 
evident. For example, concerning the nature of 
hypnotism, these questions are not yet settled be- 
yond controversy : 

(i) Is any special influence or effluence pass- 



i04 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

ing from the operator to the subject concerned in 
any of the phenomena of hypnotism ? 

(2) Is the mind or will of the operator an ele- 
ment to be reckoned with ? 

(3) Is the whole matter subjective, pertaining 
to the patient alone ? 

Of course, I am aware that by many acknowl- 
edged representatives of science the first of these 
questions is thrown out of court. The second is 
scarcely in better condition; while the third is re- 
ceived and put forward as the explanation of 
what is accepted as hypnotism. 

Braid and Carpenter, Bernheim and Heiden- 
hain are names to be considered and respected; 
and they answer the first and second of these ques- 
tions emphatically in the negative; while Elliot- 
son, Esdaile, Gurney, Richet, and a host of good 
observers have witnessed phenomena which led 
them to answer the same questions in the affirma- 
tive. 

So it seems the part of wisdom to keep the court 
open and see if new evidence appears. 

Then again, regarding the uses of hypnotism, 



SOME CASES TREATED. 105 

conclusions are widely different — some consider- 
ing it not only of very little if any use, but in 
general absolutely harmful; while others find it 
not only harmless, but of very marked and far- 
reaching value. It is evident that some of these 
conclusions are erroneous, and must have been 
drawn from a small field of observation — prob- 
ably only personal — disregarding for the most 
part the observations of others, a course which 
certainly is not always wise; for it must be re- 
membered that the phenomena connected with 
hypnotism are singularly varied in character; 
one observer may have witnessed but few of 
these, or one operator might succeed admirably 
in the use of hypnotism as a therapeutic agent and 
not be able to exhibit tricky and unusual phe- 
nomena; and any student who has not carefully 
observed many varieties of phenomena, and with 
many different subjects, is ill-qualified to decide 
offhand that an alleged phenomenon is not a fact 
or is not possible. Science is perfectly right to 
be discriminating in regard to the reported facts 
and phenomena which are new and unusual; but 



io6 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

it may not be wise to reject facts altogether, 
simply because they do not fall within certain 
prescribed lines usually known as the laws of 
Nature, for these laws are variable according to 
our knowledge of Nature. They are simply 
the formulae by which the behaviour of 
Nature is expressed, so far as zve knozi; that 
behaviour at the present time, and no further. 
Yesterday we declared that light could hot pass 
through an inch-thick wooden plank; to-day the 
interior of a box constructed of such material is 
illuminated and a coin inclosed in it is photo- 
graphed. 

This is only a modern instance, and is perhaps 
of minor import; but it is one of a series of sur- 
prises from Copernicus to the magician of Menlo 
Park, which, after a year or a generation, as the 
case might be, have forced men to revise their 
formulas of Nature's action in the physical world. 

Within the last quarter of a century the atten- 
tion of all classes of persons has more than ever 
before been directed to unusual psychic phe- 
nomena; and different classes of observers view 



SOME CASES TREATED. 107 

them from different standpoints and in different 
lights. One class at once refers the unexplained 
and mysterious to the supernatural ; another class, 
having scientific tastes and tendencies, at once sets 
about finding a way of referring them to natural 
causes, of seeing in them only links in one un- 
broken chain of antecedents and consequences; 
but even here, in a field of which we actually know 
so little, we attempt to bind Nature with laws of 
our own making, and perhaps reject valuable 
facts, or hesitate to receive them, because they 
seem to contradict or contravene some conven- 
tional formula which is taken for Nature's ulti- 
matum regarding psychic action. 

It is not the acceptance of any particular psychic 
phenomenon, nor any particular phase of psychic 
investigation, that I would favourably bespeak, 
but simply a judicial attitude, an open mind, and 
wide view of a field of investigation which will be 
found both of interest and importance. 

The cases treated by hypnotism and suggestion 
to which I would call attention may be classed as 
follows : 



io8 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

( 1 ) Those of a purely psychical character. 

(2) Cases illustrating the effect of suggestion 
on physiological processes. 

(3) The treatment of physical ailments. 

(4) The treatment of the alcohol and drug 
habit. 

(5) Educational uses of hypnotism. 
First, cases of a purely psychical character. 
Case I. — Mrs. C, forty-one years of age, 

married. Disease: Melancholia, with dominant 
idea of absolute general inability. She cannot 
walk a block without entire failure of strength; 
cannot read ten lines without feeling that the 
brain is giving out. For the same reason she can- 
not visit, attend church, nor go to any place of 
amusement. Sleep is disturbed and unrefresh- 
ing. She is generally indifferent, helpless, and 
despondent. She has already been an inmate of 
a sanitarium. She came here from a large West- 
ern town to consult an eminent specialist in 
nervous diseases; no organic disease was discov- 
ered, and she was kindly referred to me. She 
came under my care October loth, 1896. I was 



SOME CASES TREATED. 109 

able to secure a quiet subjective condition between 
sleeping and waking, but without loss of con- 
sciousness. She heard the suggestions in an im- 
perfect, indifferent way, as if at a great distance. 
Suggestions were as follows : You have no or- 
ganic disease; there is no reason why you should 
not be a perfectly well woman. You will become 
perfectly well. 

First of all, your appetite and digestion will 
improve; your sleep will be undisturbed, quiet, 
and refreshing. All this cloud of discourage- 
ment and despondency which is hanging over you 
will be lifted from your mind and will disappear ; 
you will see things in a new light — ^bright 
and cheerful — and you will be greatly encour- 
aged. 

These suggestions were repeated quietly, but 
firmly and confidently, four or five times, with in- 
tervals of silence; the whole treatment occupying 
about half an hour. She was directed to return 
in two days. The report of her attendant on her 
return was that there was an entire change in the 
condition of her mind. She slept well, was cheer- 



ii-o HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

ful, interested, and hopeful. The same sugges- 
tions were given, with the addition that she would 
be able to walk without fatigue and begin to read 
with ease and enjoyment. 

Between October loth and October 30th she 
received six treatments, each report showing 
marked improvement in her condition, both 
physical and mental; so that on the latter date 
she reported herself, and was reported by her at- 
tendant — a sister who was accustomed to see her 
in health — as entirely well. I directed that she 
should go about and enjoy herself, remain away 
from me two weeks, and then return. She did 
so, and on November 14th reported that she was 
perfectly well; and she remarked, " No one knows 
how wretched I was five weeks ago, and so no 
one but myself can appreciate how great is the 
change." 

Two days later she started for her home in the 
West, where she took her proper place in her 
farnily. I have heard several times since that 
there has been no relapse and that she remains 
well. 



SOME CASES TREATED. iii 

A form of what is usually a purely psychic dis- 
turbance is that which relates to the different 
overwhelming fears or phobias — the misnamed 
hydrophobia excepted. 

One of the most common and at the same time 
most distressing of these is the excessive and un- 
controllable fear of thunder and lightning, which 
may be properly named bronte-phobia. I have 
observed several instances of the excellent effect 
of suggestion in removing this condition. I will 
relate a single one : 

Case II. — The daughter of a medical friend 
w4th whom I was spending some time in the sum- 
mer was about eighteen years of age and in per- 
fect health. She was greatly afflicted, however, 
by this unconquerable fear of thunder and light- 
ning — so much so as at times to deprive her of all 
presence of mind or power of action; and the ner- 
vous shock was quite serious in its effects. 

On the approach of a thunderstorm she imme- 
diately shut herself up in the closest and darkest 
available place, and remained there until the dis- 
turbing influence had passed by. She was an ex- 



112 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

cellent hypnotic subject, and being put in the deep 
sleep, I suggested that thunder and Hghtning 
were usually perfectly harmless; that she had 
nothing to fear from them, and that now, here- 
after, all her dread and terror of them would en- 
tirely disappear. She would have no dread, no 
terror, and no nervous shock, but her mind would 
be calm and composed, and she would have per- 
fect self-control. 

This was repeated with positive assurance sev- 
eral times, and then she was awakened. 

The test of the treatment soon came in the form 
of a terrific country thunderstorm — trying even 
to the strongest nerves. This young lady, instead 
of seeking her accustomed seclusion, seemed per- 
fectly fearless, and busied herself with soothing 
and encouraging the younger children and serv- 
ants. She was entirely composed and acted with 
perfect self-control. 

Under this same heading of psychic disturb- 
ances might be mentioned cases of lifelong and 
very troublesome somnambulism, and also of 
night terror in young children, which have been 



SOME CASES TREATED. 113 

permanently dismissed by a single treatment by 
suggestion. 

The second class of cases to which I would call 
your attention illustrates the effect of hypnotism 
and suggestion upon physiological processes. By 
this such processes are meant as digestion, assimi- 
lation, absorption, the circulation of the blood, the 
menstrual function, and lactation. I will refer to 
a case where the function of the lower bowel was 
influenced by suggestion. 

Case III. — Miss A. was a bright, intelligent 
German girl, twenty-six years of age, free from 
any hysterical or nervous symptoms. She was the 
subject of obstinate constipation; her movements 
seldom occurred without medicine, and she often 
went for four or five days without relief. She 
was easily hypnotised, and one evening, while in 
the hypnotic condition, she was given a teaspoon- 
ful of pure water with the suggestion that it was 
a bitter dose, but very powerful, and would give a 
very free movement from the bowels at seven 
o'clock the following morning. She took the 
water with many grimaces at its bitter taste, and 



114 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

the suggestion was realised with great promptness 
and energy at exactly seven o'clock in the morn- 
ing. I could give equally striking examples of 
the prompt effect of suggestion upon the men- 
strual function, and upon lactation. I will give an 
instance of its effect upon the vasomotor system. 

Case IV. — Miss R., forty-two years of age, 
though in appearance not over thirty, has a ruddy 
complexion, a bright, intelligent face, and is a 
teacher by occupation. 

She was afflicted with inordinate and excessive 
blushing. It occurred mostly in company, and 
especially when addressed by men; then the ex- 
cessive flush came to her face so as to attract the 
attention of every one near her. But the most 
distressing symptom was the mental confusion 
which accompanied it. The brain seemed to be 
overwhelmed at the same time ; she became dazed, 
her presence of mind entirely forsook her, she 
could command neither thought nor word, and 
was utterly unable to reply. This, of course, 
often made her appear ridiculous and caused her 
intense mortification. 



SOME CASES TREATED. 115 

She came to me March 30th, 1898. A fairly 
subjective and suggestible condition was secured, 
with even light sleep. I suggested : You will lose 
your excessive self-consciousness in the presence 
of men; you will be calm and confident when ad- 
dressed by them. The nervous system, and espe- 
cially the vasomotor system, will act normally; 
the flow of blood to the capillaries of the face will 
be restrained, become normal, and the excessive 
blushing will cease. 

According to appointment, she returned two 
days later. She was greatly impressed with the 
effect of her treatment; the blushing and confu- 
sion were decidedly diminished; the improve- 
ment was so marked that there was no mistak- 
ing it. 

I now learned the following facts : She had two 
sisters, both of whom have the same trouble and 
manifested under similar circumstances; also a 
niece, the daughter of her brother, a girl ten years 
of age. She herself also had the trouble when a 
little girl, and even then it was in the presence of 
boys, as later it was in the presence of men. It 



ii6 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

was entirely without any sexual ideas or emotion. 
She spoke with perfect frankness; said that she 
always had been a man-hater, avoiding and even 
insulting both men and boys. As she expressed 
it, she never had any womanly feeling toward 
men until she was twenty-seven years of age, 
when there was a decided change in that respect. 
Since then she had seemed to be attractive to men, 
had many admirers, and a love affair which had 
an unhappy ending; but through all these experi- 
ences the blushing and confusion remained the 
same. 

I suggested as follows: The old thought of 
mental confusion, associated with your blushing, 
even from childhood, will how be removed and 
dismissed from your mind. It will no longer 
affect your thought or life. You will be able to 
converse with men without embarrassment or con- 
straint. Other suggestions made were similar to 
those at her former treatment. 

A third treatment was given April 7, at which 
time she reported very marked improvement, both 
as regards blushing and the power of self-control. 



SOME CASES TREATED. 117 

So great was the improvement as to be a surprise 
both to herself and her friends. 

As she was obliged to leave the city, I instructed 
her in regard to auto-suggestion while going to 
sleep at night, and furnished her a formula similar 
to that I had used. Later I received a letter from 
her from a distant city, expressing great satis- 
faction at her improved condition. She had also 
been able to use auto-suggestion successfully, and 
felt that, if there was any return of the trouble, 
she had the remedy in her own hands. 

Case V. — Its influence upon lactation. Mrs. 
H. was a young mother, a primipara. Her in- 
fant was two weeks old, and notwithstanding 
care had been intelligently given to secure a 
proper supply of milk, scarcely a drop appeared, 
and the child had to depend entirely upon artificial 
feeding. The mother was anxious to nurse her 
baby, and I proposed hypnotism. She proved a 
fairly good subject and went easily into a condi- 
tion of light sleep, in which I suggested that the 
organs for supplying milk were perfect and only 
needed stimulating to proper activity; that at 



nS HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

I P. M., it being then 1 1 a. m.^ she would take her 
bowl of hot gruel; at 2 o'clock she would feel the 
milk coming freely into her breasts and there 
would be ah abundance for the baby. The sug- 
gestion was exactly fulfilled in every particular, 
and at 2 p. m. the babe had a full and satisfying 
meal from the mother's breasts, and artificial feed- 
ing was discontinued. 

In this connection I will refer to an incident 
which occurred thirteen years ago. It was in re- 
lation to a case of traumatic neuritis of thirty-five 
years' duration, which terminated fatally by 
exhaustion when the patient was only thirty-eight 
years of age. Every known remedy was made 
use of, including repeated section of the nerves 
involved, as advised by the most eminent neurolo- 
gists and surgeons, both here and in Europe. 

For the last seven years of her life the patient 
was under the care of Dr. Mary Putnam Jacobi, 
with the exception of three months and a half 
immediately preceding her death, when Dr. Jacobi . 
was away. 

The case was fully reported in the 'American 



SOME CASES TREATED. 119 

Journal of the Medical Sciences for July, 1885. 
I will designate it as 

Case VI. — This patient, Miss T., came under 
my care June 9, 1885. The affected right hand 
and arm were of a dark-purplish colour, cold, dis- 
agreeable to the touch, and entirely useless. The 
muscles were atrophied and the fingers contracted. 
They had been in this condition for years. About 
three weeks before her death I was one day speak- 
ing to her about hypnotism, and suggested a trial 
as a relief, temporary at least, to some of her suf- 
ferings. She assented, and by monotonous passes 
from head to feet, as she was lying in bed, she was 
put into the condition of light sleep, with easily 
induced rigidity of a finger or the hand. After 
ten or fifteen minutes of sleep I noticed that the 
affected hand had become normal in colour. I 
took hold of it and laid it, palm down, upon the 
counterpane. The fingers were easily straight- 
ened out, and they retained their extended posi- 
tion. I placed the hand in a comfortable posi- 
tion and made a few passes from the shoulder to 
the tips of the fingers. 



120 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

No suggestions of any kind were made. The 
period of suggestion had not then arrived. Bern- 
heim's book did not appear even in France until 
the following year, and in English not till three 
years later. 

I allowed my patient to sleep quietly for an 
hour, and then awoke her. Her hand still re- 
mained extended upon the counterpane — a really 
beautiful object, most delicately white, but still 
lifelike, a wonderful contrast to the dead thing 
it seemed before she went to sleep. 

Presently I called her attention to her hand, 
which she gazed at with the greatest astonish- 
ment and pleasure. 

She awoke with a general feeling of well-being 
and comfort, quite unusual to her, and it con- 
tinued several hours; but at length the old condi- 
tions gradually returned, and with them the 
purple colour and ungraceful contraction of the 
hand. 

The treatment was repeated on two other occa- 
sions with the same result. After the second 
treatment, looking at her hand with a pleased and 



SOME CASES TREATED. 121 

humourous expression, she exclaimed : '* Well ! 
well! When I go to my next ball I shall surely 
want you to come and beautify my hand." This 
incident was not mentioned in the printed report, 
but it seems to me a fair example of the effect of 
hypnotism alone upon physiological processes. 

As an illustration of my third division, the 
effect of hypnotism and suggestion upon patho- 
logical conditions, I will present the following: 

Case VIL— Mrs. A., aged twenty-eight years, 
married; confined with her third child October 
^3) 1897. Two weeks previous to her confine- 
ment the two children which she then had were 
down with measles. She lived in an apartment, 
front and back rooms with two bedrooms between. 
Seclusion and disinfection were attended to as 
well as possible under the circumstances. Con- 
finement was normal, and everything went fairly 
well until the fifth day, when I found her with a 
temperature of 103 J^*' F., excessive headache, 
flushed face, mental confusion, no sleep for 
twenty- four hours past; pulse 116, hard and 
irregular. There was great pain in the back and 



122 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

limbs, and the whole was accompanied by an over- 
whelming feeling of apprehension. 

She had never been hypnotised, and I had never 
spoken to her of hypnotism, nor did I now, but 
her condition was so pitiable that, as I stood by her 
l3ed, I placed my hand soothingly upon her fore- 
head, then made light passes over it with gentle 
touches ; in four or five minutes her eyelids quiv- 
ered and closed, and presently she was asleep. 
Passes made over an outstretched finger made it 
rigid. Undoubtedly she was in the deep hypnotic 
sleep. I then made passes away from her head 
and down her body, from head to feet, for ten 
minutes, then allowed her to sleep fifteen minutes; 
suggested that her headache and all her pains 
would at once disappear, her mind become clear, 
and that she would have abundant sleep; I then 
suggested that she would awake feeling greatly 
refreshed when I counted five. She awoke 
promptly as suggested, and was perfectly free 
from pain; her temperature had fallen a degree 
and a half, and all her confusion and apprehen- 
sion had disappeared. She slept most of th'e 



SOME CASES TREATED. 1^3 

afternoon and night. Her condition was at once 
greatly improved and she made a slow, but excel- 
lent recovery. 

Case VIII. — A patient came to me with a deep 
cut three inches in extent along the palmar aspect 
of the left thumb and hand. It had been neg- 
lected for several days, and was now covered 
with a gray unhealthy slough and was so 
painful that any attempt to dress or even touch 
it elicited violent resistance, and almost hys- 
terical shrieks. She was an excellent hypnotic 
subject, and I immediately put her into the 
hypnotic sleep. I suggested that the wound 
would no longer be painful — that the dress- 
ing would give no discomfort and that the 
healing would be rapid and painless. Five 
minutes later I woke her and at once proceeded 
to cleanse and dress the wound, while she looked 
on with perfect composure and quite without suf- 
fering. As suggested, the wound healed rapidly 
and without pain. 

I will give a single example of the treatment of 
the alcohol and drug habit by hypnotism. 



iM HYPNOTISM AND SUGGE:^TION. 

Case IX. — C L., actor, forty-two years old, 
was brought to me April 30th, 1898, for treat- 
ment for both the alcohol and morphine habit. 
He had recently been taking his quart or more of 
whiskey and ten to fifteen grains of morphine 
daily. Within the past few days he had left off 
about half of each drug, and was in very bad con- 
dition, though still able to be about. He could 
take no breakfast, and very little food of any 
kind; suffered severe pains in his legs and back; 
was bathed in cold perspiration, was weak and 
depressed, hardly hoping to be cured. 

Hypnotised, and found him an excellent sub- 
ject. Suggested a very little decrease in his 
drugs, but assured him of final success; also that 
his pains would be greatly relieved, that he would 
sleep at night straight on until seven o'clock in 
the morning, that he would awake refreshed and 
eat a good breakfast, would feel stronger, and 
come to me for treatment the following day. 
These suggestions were almost exactly fulfilled. 
He had slept, taken food, and retained it perfectly. 

I then suggested that he should reduce his 



SOME CASES TREATED. 125 

whiskey to four fair drinks a day, and his mor- 
phine to three grains ; and I directed carefully how 
each should be taken; other suggestions similar 
to those the day before. These suggestions were 
also carried out almost to the letter, without his 
knowing what they were. Asking him why he 
did it, he said he did not know, only he felt that he 
could, and that it was best. 

During the next four days the whiskey was di- 
minished and dropped entirely. 

I then commenced reducing the morphine en- 
tirely by suggestion, still allowing him to use the 
syringe himself, reporting to me every second 
day. When reduced to one grain a day, I gave 
him the morphine that he was to use each day in 
solution, assuring him that he would soon be 
safely free from his bondage without the least 
suffering. 

At the end of six days he had for three days 
been taking only pure water made slightly bitter 
with strychnine. He had a great dread of the 
sudden removal of the morphine, and when in- 
formed that he was now entirely free from his 



126 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

relentless enemy, and had not even had a particle 
of morphine in his possession for three days, he 
nearly fainted with surprise and delight. 

The whole treatment lasted six weeks. 

During the last half of the time, in addition to 
suggestion regarding his disease, I was also sug- 
gesting ambition and higher ideals regarding his 
profession and his own position in it ; that he was 
capable of better things, and would rise to the at- 
tainment of them. To-day he is playing here in 
this city in a first-rate company, and in a much 
higher grade of dramatic work than that in which 
he had formerly been engaged. 

Regarding my fifth division — the educational 
uses of hypnotism — I would say that its impor- 
tance is only now beginning to be appreciated. 
For the sake of indicating its use I will present a 
single example here, reserving a more full con- 
sideration of the subject to a later chapter. 

Case X. — M. V., a boy nine years of age. 
Father a criminal with a State-prison record. 
Mother ah upright, mild, intelligent woman. 
The boy has a bad face when in repose, but better 



SOME CASES TREATED, 127 

when animated or smiling. His head was 
markedly unsymmetrical in infancy and early 
childhood. Left ear deformed. Sense of right 
and wrong decidedly dull; intellect good. He 
was disobedient, rough, uncouth; coarse in speech, 
violent in temper, and regardless of consequences 
when angry; cruel to playmates, pulling their 
hair, pinching and striking them. His mother 
and grandmother, with whom he lived, could do 
nothing with him, nor could any one else; and 
seeing these characteristics, his mother became 
most anxious concerning his future. I attempted 
to hypnotise him at my office more than a year 
ago, but he was violent and noisy in his resistance, 
and it was impossible to secure his attention. 
For a whole year afterward he would not come 
into my house, but always ran away as soon as he 
was brought to the door. At last, three months 
ago, things became so bad, he was so perfectly un- 
manageable, and his temper so outrageous, that 
his mother begged me to come to the house and 
see if I could do anything with him. 

Having secured carte blanche for whatever 



128 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

course I chose to pursue with him, I went. He 
was in the back room, his grandmother urging 
him forward toward the front, he kicking and re- 
sisting. Without speaking, I went directly to 
him, seized him firmly by one wrist, and brought 
him topsy-turvy through two intervening rooms, 
gave him a thorough shaking, and sat him down 
violently in a chair. 

He whimpered a little and made a gruff remark. 
I simply told him I had not intended to hurt him, 
but, as he had never obeyed anybody, I had come 
to the house for the express purpose of making 
him obey me, and I should most certainly do it. 
After a few moments I said quietly, " Now, go 
and lie down on the bed in the next room." He 
started, walking toward the bed, but when near it 
he set off on a full run past it and into the back 
room. I brought him back in no gentle manner, 
and again ordered him to lie down on the bed. 
He went toward it as if to obey, but suddenly 
sprang under it, and clung to the slats underneath 
with hands and feet and hung there like a mon- 
key. I turned up the mattress, dislodged him 



SOME CASES TREATED. 129 

by main force, pulled him out, gave him a lively 
spanking, and surprised him by tossing him vig- 
orously upon the bed, with the command to lie 
there quietly until I gave him permission to move. 
He obeyed. Presently I ordered him to go into 
the front room and sit down again in the chair he 
had before occupied. Again he quietly obeyed. 
I said: '' All right; now you understand you will 
obey me. I don't want to hurt you. I want to 
be a good friend to you, only you must obey me,^' 

I then in a pleasant way gave him a short les- 
son, picturing to him very plainly the course of a 
boy such as he was, and where it would be likely 
to end; and also showing what he might be if he 
would change his course. I told him I should be 
at the house again in a day or two and I should 
expect him to meet me pleasantty, shake hands 
with me, and do whatever I directed him. 

The next day there came a telephone message 
begging me to come up, M. was outrageous again. 
T went. He was backward in greeting me, but at 
length came and shook hands. I afterward 
learned that there had not been the slightest im- 



13© HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

provement in his behaviour, and the cause of his 
mother's sending for me was his outrageous con- 
duct at the table, when, in a fit of anger, he had 
thrown a plate at his grandmother. I talked to 
him pleasantly a moment, and then said very 
quietly, " Now go and lie down on the bed." He 
did so at once. I sat down beside him, and tak- 
ing his two thumbs firmly in my hands I said: 
'' Now, M., I want you to look steadily at that 
little stud in my shirt-front; keep your eyes very 
steadily fixed upon it." He did so, and I never 
secured better or more concentrated attention 
from any patient. 

In five or six minutes his eyelids quivered and 
soon drooped. I closed them, suggesting sleep; 
and directly he was in the sound hypnotic sleep. 
I then presented the two pictures again, the bad 
course and the good course, and suggested that 
they would always be present, distinct in his mind, 
that he would dislike the wrong course and desire 
to avoid it, and choose the good one. I sug- 
gested definitely that he would be kind and con- 
siderate of his mother, and obey her as well as me. 



SOME CASES TREATED. 131 

I repeated these suggestions very positively, let 
him sleep ten minutes, and repeated them again, 
and then woke him by counting. 

The effect of this treatment was very marked : 
his whole manner at home was changed, and he 
became comparatively docile and manageable. 

He came to my office for his next treatment, 
which was perfectly successful. I have given 
him in all six treatments, and the improvement 
has been maintained and increased. He is not 
yet by any means perfect, but his general be- 
haviour is changed, and I am suggesting such 
definite improvements in his conduct, and impress- 
ing such pictures upon his mind, as I think will 
help to develop his better nature and qualities. 
He is a lover of flowers, and on two occasions has 
brought some of his own choosing to me. He 
has lost none of his boyishness; he is full of life; 
is mischievous, playing tricks even upon his 
mother; but he is affectionate and generally obe- 
dient, though the strap is occasionally exhibited 
as a reminder. His will is not broken, but he has 
self-control^ and he is far more considerate of 



132 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

Others than formerly. In short, he is a fair 
example of one of the educational uses of hyp- 
notism and suggestion. 

In this case it was necessary to secure obedience 
before I could secure attention; and attention is 
necessary to obtain the proper subjective con- 
dition. 

I will add that this boy has now been under my 
observation for nearly two years, with occasional 
treatments by hypnotism and suggestion — some- 
times once a week and sometimes only once a 
month — and the improvement in his appearance, 
habits, character, and moral perception is most 
marked and gratifying. 

Such are a few facts coming under my own 
observation which attest the claim of hypnotism 
and suggestion to favourable consideration. 



CHAPTER IV. 

EDUCATIONAL USES OF HYPNOTISM. 

In the domain of hypnotism two broad fields of 
investigation are open and are assiduously culti- 
vated; one is the field of therapeutics — the amelio- 
ration and cure of diseased conditions; the other 
is the field of psychology — the relation which hyp- 
notism bears to mental action and the clues which 
it gives to strange and important phenomena 
which have long been misunderstood or else alto- 
gether ignored. In both of these fields much 
good work has already been done, while much 
still remains to be accomplished. But a third 
field is beginning to be opened up — still broader, 
and one which may yet prove of greater interest 
and utility than either of the others; it is the edu- 
cational field — the influence which may be exerted 
by hypnotism upon the development and improve- 
ment of mind. How far it may be applicable to 

»33 



134 HYPNOTISM AHD SUGGESTION. 

the development of the normal intellect it is not 
necessary now to inquire — the needs in that di- 
rection are not imperative; but when one views 
the number of children brought into the world 
with imperfect mental organisations and vicious 
tendencies, and sees how little impression in gen- 
eral is made upon them by the ordinary and even 
the special processes of education, it is of interest 
to inquire if there are no other methods by which 
these deficiencies may in a measure be remedied 
and the vicious tendencies eradicated. 

Enough is already known of hypnotism gener- 
ally to warrant us in looking with confidence in 
that direction for efficient and practical help; and 
experiment has shown that our expectations are 
not likely to be disappointed. What are the facts 
and methods now ready for inspection? 

Both of the important fields with which we are 
already acquainted, the therapeutic and psychic, 
present obvious analogies to the comparatively 
new one now under consideration. When hyp- 
notism, under the name of animal magnetism, was 
brought to light a hundred years ago, the main 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 135 

feature presented was its curative influence upon 
disease; and, while its curious psychological phe- 
nomena were studiously noted, the main object of 
those who so energetically, and in the face of 
ignorant and discourteous opposition, pursued its 
study during the first half-century of its use was 
to find the best methods of making it efficient as a 
therapeutic agent. All these early experimenters 
produced the hypnotic condition by means of 
passes and manipulations, and had no doubt but 
that some influence or virtue passed from the 
operator to the subject, by which he was put to 
sleep and by which also curative effects were pro- 
duced. 

Half a century later, midway in the history of 
the subject. Braid began to produce hypnotic 
effects by other means than those used by the early 
mesmerists, and to throw doubt upon the theory 
of a magnetic influence; and, while he introduced 
a new name, new procedures, and, to a greater 
extent, the psychic element, he did not increase 
the practical curative effects which had hitherto 
been the main object of those who devoted them- 



136 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

selves to the study and practice of the new art. 
Under the influence of Liebeault, Charcot, and 
Bernheim, the psychic element was still further 
recognised and emphasised, and suggestion was 
made the prominent feature in treatment; but it 
was still the therapeutic value of hypnotism which 
constituted the leading element and motive in its 
study, and it was in hospitals and the private prac- 
tice of physicians that it was chiefly studied and 
made use of. So, from its first appearance to the 
present time, its therapeutic value has been recog- 
nised, and has constituted one of its leading fea- 
tures. Only second to this have been the psychic 
phenomena which have accompanied the hypnotic 
condition, and which have come to excite more 
and more interest and to assume greater and 
greater importance. 

Of these psychic phenomena, that which most 
nearly concerns our present purpose is the in- 
creased power of suggestion, as shown by the 
facility with which the hypnotised subject may 
be influenced, and the wonderful effect, — physical, 
mental, and moral, — which suggestion, properly 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 137 

applied in the hypnotic condition, is able to 
produce. 

Some of these effects have already be^o^jje^ 
scribed and examples given. Such physical 
effects as the following are possible : The rate of 
the pulse may be increased or diminished; con- 
traction or relaxation of certain muscles may be 
produced; a blister may be raised, or bleeding 
points upon the hands or feet may be made to ap- 
pear, either by suggestion alone while in the hyp- 
notic condition, or by suggestion accompanied by 
a touch. 

If such physical effects are possible, it may 
easily be believed that mental and moral effects 
may also be induced — and such we know to be 
the fact. 

Here, then, we come directly upon the bound- 
aries of our present subject, namely, the edu- 
cational element in hypnotism; for, if mental 
and moral effects in the direction of improve- 
ment can be produced and made permanent, we 
have taken a long step in a true educational 
process. 



138 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

To what extent has this been actually accom- 
plished ? 

A very marked and, it must also be said, most 
unusual case is reported in the Annales Medico- 
Psychologiques, and has been verified and sum- 
marised by Mr. F. W. H. Myers, Secretary of 
the Society for Psychical Research. 

Still further condensed, it is as follows : In the 
summer of 1884 there was at the Saltpetriere a 
young woman of a deplorable type — a criminal 
lunatic, filthy in habits and violent in demeanour, 
and with a life-long history of impurity and theft. 
M. Auguste Voisin, one of the physicians of the 
hospital staff, undertook to hypnotise her at a time 
when she could be kept quiet only by the strait- 
jacket and the continuous application of cold to 
her head. She would not look at the operator, 
but raved and spat at him. M. Voisin, however, 
kept his face close to hers and followed her eyes 
wherever she moved them. In ten minutes she 
was asleep, and in five minutes more she passed 
into the sleep-waking or somnambulic state and 
began to talk incoherently. This treatment being 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 139 

repeated on many successive days, she gradually 
became sane when in the hypnotic condition, 
though she still raved when awake. 

At length she came to obey in her waking hours 
commands impressed upon her in her trance — 
trivial matters, such as to sweep her room — then 
suggestions involving marked changes in her be- 
haviour; finally, in the hypnotic state, she volun- 
tarily expressed regret for her past life, and of her 
own accord made good resolutions for the future, 
which she carried out when awake; and the im- 
provement in her conduct and character was per- 
manent. Two years later M. Voisin wrote that 
she was a nurse in a Paris hospital and that her 
conduct was irreproachable. 

This is an unusual, but by no means a unique 
case. M. Voisin has reported others equally 
striking; and M. Dufour, medical director of an- 
other asylum, has also found hypnotism " able to 
render important service in the treatment of 
mental disease," and has adopted it as a regular 
and important factor in its cure. 

I mention these cases not as being the most 



140 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

practical in character, but as showing the power 
for good of hypnotic treatment in some cases of 
a most unpromising class. The class to which I 
would especially call attention is the one embrac- 
ing mental deficiencies, evil habits, and vicious 
tendencies, exhibited especially in childhood and 
youth. Under the head of mental deficiencies 
may be mentioned dulness of perception, imper- 
fect power of attention, deficient memory, and 
general inaptitude for acquiring knowledge; 
under evil habits may be mentioned personal un- 
cleanliness, biting the nails, idleness, cowardice, 
the tobacco, opium, or alcohol habit; and under 
vicious tendencies, lying, unconscious misrepre- 
sentation, kleptomania, needless cruelty, and 
moral perversity. 

At the Second International Congress of Ex- 
perimental Psychology, held in London in 1892, 
a paper was read by Dr. Berillon, editor of the 
Revue de rHypnotisme, entitled " The Appli- 
cation of Hypnotic Suggestion to Education." 
Under his observation hypnotism and suggestion 
had been successfully utilised in the treatment of 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 141 

more than 250 children with reference to the fol- 
lowing diseases and tendencies : nervous insomnia, 
night terror, somnambulism, kleptomania, stam- 
mering, inveterate idleness, uncleanliness, cow- 
ardice, biting the nails, and moral perversity. 
He stated further that facts relative to the suc- 
cessful treatment of these diseases by suggestion 
had been verified by a great number of observers 
and authors, and that such facts constituted the 
practical side of psychology. Suggestion made 
it possible to submit the development of the vari- 
ous intellectual faculties of the child to a careful 
analysis, and thus to facilitate the process of edu- 
cation. 

Knowing well the benign as well as powerful 
influence of hypnotism and suggestion, especially 
upon children, such reports at once stimulated the 
present writer to active work in the same field. 
It was found to be a most effective and useful 
work, and the success attained was fully equal to 
that obtained in other abnormal conditions in 
which hypnotism had been use. It was surpris- 
ing, as well as gratifying, to note the rapid im- 



142 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

provement, both intellectual and moral, which 
was the direct result of the treatment.* 

A most important fact, and one which renders 
the use of suggestion of much wider application 
than has usually been thought possible, was also 
fully demonstrated, namely, that in order to ac- 
complish the proposed object it is not necessary 
that the deep hypnotic sleep should be produced. 
Many persons consulting a physician for hyp- 
notic treatment suppose it necessary that they 
should go into the deep trance and pass through 
all the wonderful stages and experiences which 
occasionally accompany this condition; associated 
with this supposition is also the idea that some 
miraculous change or therapeutic effect is to be 
suddenly achieved; and, while it is true that such 
sudden and seemingly miraculous effects are 
sometimes produced, yet in the aggregate ten 
times more good is accomplished by the slower 
process of repeated suggestion upon cases in 

*(i) "Educational Uses of Hypnotism," North American 
Revie7v, October, 1896. 

(2) " Educational Uses of Hypnotism" — A Reply to Criti- 
cisms, Pediatrics, February, 1897. 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 143 

which the hypnotic condition is only partially se- 
cured, and in which neither absolute unconscious- 
ness nor absolute anaesthesia accompanies the 
processes employed; and this is the use of hyp- 
notic suggestion to which I would especially apply 
the term educational. 

In order to make this newer use of hypnotism 
apparent and reasonable to those to whom the 
subject is new, the nature and function of the sub- 
conscious mind must be taken into account — its 
susceptibility to suggestion and its ability to im- 
press upon the conscious mind the suggestions 
which it receives. This is illustrated in post- 
hypnotic suggestion generally. As we have seen, 
in the hypnotic sleep the ordinary consciousness 
is in abeyance — submerged — its ordinary percep- 
tions are dull or obliterated, while the subcon- 
scious mind is dominant and is the perceiving and 
acting personality. Suggestions then given are 
received by the subconscious mind and by it are 
impressed upon the conscious mind or primary 
self in such a manner that, on again resuming con- 
trol, it carries out the suggestion so received, 



144 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

either at once or at some later suggested period — 
even days or weeks afterwards. 

Dr. Bramwell of London has made some curi- 
ous experiments illustrating this action of the 
subconscious mind, and at the same time its 
strangely accurate appreciation of time; for 
example, he suggested to his hypnotised subject 
that after a lapse — say of 4327 minutes — what- 
ever she might be doing she would immediately 
note the time and record it. If asleep, she would 
wake and do the same thing. He recorded the 
exact time the suggestion was given, having no 
idea of the day or hour when the expiration of the 
number of minutes mentioned would occur. 
The patient was simply requested to keep pencil 
and paper, and the means of ascertaining the time 
always at hand. The time marked by the patient 
would always denote the number of minutes 
designated, either exactly or with a variation of 
one or two minutes. The experiment was made 
many times, under a variety of circumstances and 
with different observers, who also assigned the 
number of minutes that were to elapse. Post- 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 145 

hypnotic suggestions are among the simplest and 
most successful of hypnotic experiments, and 
they show the facility with which the subcon- 
scious mind receives suggestions and impresses 
them upon the ordinary conscious self. 

Suppose the physician has a patient in the deep 
hypnotic sleep; apparently he hears nothing, per- 
haps feels nothing. The physician quietly, but 
very positively, says to him : " When you awake 
you will take the book which lies on the corner of 
my desk, open it at the forty-third page, and 
read aloud four lines at the top of the page." He 
is then awakened. He remembers nothing of 
what has been said to him, but his subliminal self, 
which has been made accessible by hypnotism, has 
heard and influences him to carry out the sugges- 
tions. He goes to the desk and takes up the 
designated book, finds the forty-third page and 
reads the four lines at the top ; he has no thought 
but that he is doing it all of his own accord ; and 
so he is — he is obeying the impulse of his own 
subliminal self. This is what might be called the 
mechanism of suggestion. Let it be applied for 



146 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

effecting a radical change in habit, or for pur- 
poses of mental or moral improvement. 

Suppose the patient to be a boy with the ciga- 
rette habit, and the physician had suggested as 
follows: "When you awake you will no longer 
desire to smoke. On the contrary, the very 
thought of it will be disagreeable to you, and you 
will avoid it altogether." He awakes, he knows 
nothing of what has transpired, but he finds he 
has no longer the desire to smoke, and conse- 
quently he ceases the practice. 

Or this may have been the suggestion : " You 
know your parents are greatly troubled and anx- 
ious about your smoking; you are too young; it 
will be harmful to you. When you awake this 
idea will be constantly before you, and it will so 
influence your action that, in compliance with the 
wishes of your parents, and because you will be 
convinced of its harmful effects, you will at once 
leave off the habit." And so he does. 

But perhaps only one in ten of those applying 
for treatment is a good hypnotic subject and can 
be influenced in this comparatively easy manner. 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 147 

What of the other nine — can they have no assist- 
ance ? On the contrary, nearly every one of them 
can be brought into the hypnotic condition to a 
greater or less degree — usually into a condition of 
reverie or light sleep, in which the ordinary self is 
passive and the subliminal self may be more or 
less perfectly reached and influenced. These are 
the more difficult cases — less striking and less 
satisfactory to both patient and physician; never- 
theless, they are cases in which perseverance can 
accomplish a great deal, and is almost sure of 
achieving success. 

Putting the patient into the best hypnotic condi- 
tion possible, the suggestions are firmly and ear- 
nestly made and repeated; he is then aroused; he 
has been quieted and peculiarly rested; perhaps 
he thinks he has heard what has been said to him, 
but very likely he is unable to repeat it. The 
treatment is repeated at short intervals for a few 
days or weeks, and in a majority of cases the de- 
sired result is secured. It is in this manner, by 
frequent repetition, that the educational effect of 
hypnotic suggestion is obtained, whether in the 



148 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

deep sleep or light hypnotic condition. An im- 
perfect memory to be stimulated, a kleptomaniac 
to be restrained, or a case of habitual lying to be 
influenced, and a mental force and moral senti- 
ment induced — these are matters requiring tact, 
labour, and patience; but much can be accom- 
plished. An intellectual perception and a moral 
sentiment are at length established where pre- 
cept and punishment under ordinary conditions 
had proved of no avail. 

Numerous examples could be cited, not only of 
these moral deformities and deficiencies remedied, 
but also in the line of ordinary education, where 
there was absolute inability to concentrate the 
mind upon the given task, or where every idea re- 
garding it vanished, leaving the mind a blank the 
moment the pupil stood up in the classroom, or 
where memory entirely failed to retain the ac- 
quired lesson; or still again, where even in adults 
the ability to spell correctly or use grammatical 
language was wanting; and where a few hypnotic 
treatments by suggestion have given the power to 
concentrate the mind upon study — to retain and 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 149 

express clearly what was learned — and where, by 
the same means, a good degree of facility in spell- 
ing and the correct use of language has been ac- 
quired. 

I will present a few cases coming under my 
own observation and illustrating some of the 
various deficiencies and evil tendencies where, as 
educational agents, hypnotism and suggestion 
have been found useful. 

Case I. — A girl fifteen years of age, a pupil 
in one of the grammar schools of New York, 
was intelligent in many ways; a good reader of 
such books as interested her — history, biography, 
and the better class of novels — but for the routine 
of school studies she had no aptitude; and she was 
constantly being left back in her classes. She 
could not concentrate her mind upon details which 
did not specially interest her. If she succeeded in 
learning a lesson she could not remember it, and 
if she remembered it until she arrived at the class- 
room, when she arose to recite it was instantly 
gone; her mind became a perfect blank — she had 
not a word to say and was obliged to sit down in 



150 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

disgrace. She could write a good composition, 
but could never stand up and read it before the 
class. Teachers had been engaged to give her 
special lessons, so as to enable her to pass a pre- 
liminary examination, which would allow her to 
come up for entrance to the Normal College. 
After months of effort they reported to the mother 
that it was utterly useless to go on ; it was impos- 
sible for her to pass her preliminary examination, 
and they did not think it right to take her money 
with any such expectation. She was then 
brought to me to inquire if anything could be 
done to help her. I proposed hypnotic sugges- 
tion. It was then March 30th — the first exami- 
nation was in May. I commenced treatment at 
once. The patient went into a quiet, subjective 
condition, with closed eyes, but did not lose con- 
sciousness. I suggested that she would be able 
to concentrate her mind oh her studies; that her 
memory would be improved; and that she would 
lose her excessive self-consciousness and timidity, 
and in their place she would have full confidence 
in herself and be able to stand up before the class 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 151 

and recite. She was kept in the hypnotic condi- 
tion one-half hour at each treatment, and the same 
or similar suggestions were quietly, but very posi- 
tively, made and repeated at intervals during that 
time. She at once reported improvement in her 
ability both to study and recite. She had six 
treatments, and on May 25th she reported that, 
greatly to the surprise of her teachers, she had 
passed her preliminary examination with a per- 
centage of 79, which entitled her to come up for 
the college examination. In June she passed her 
examination for entrance to the Normal College 
with a percentage of 88 — entered the college and 
is at present doing well, though the suggestions 
have not been repeated since May.* 

Case II. — A generally intelligent, but unedu- 
cated woman, thirty-five years of age, although a 
good reader, experienced the greatest difficulty in 
spelling; she never wrote a letter without being 

* This patient went through her course at the Normal College 
with a percentage of nearly 90, graduated among the first fifty in 
a class of 450 students, passed an excellent examination for her 
teacher's certificate, and at once received her appointment. 
She had but one treatment during her college course. 



152 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

obliged to consult a dictionary for the spelling of 
a majority of the words. All her life she had 
been a sleep-walker of the most troublesome sort 
— often putting herself in embarrassing and even 
dangerous situations while perfectly unconscious 
in sleep. She was an excellent hypnotic subject, 
and she was entirely cured of her somnambulism 
by a single treatment by suggestion, and has not 
left her bed while asleep for nearly two years. 
One day,, now a year ago, she asked me if I could 
not do something by suggestion for her trouble- 
some inability to spell. I replied that I would 
make the trial if she desired. Accordingly, I 
suggested as follows : *' You can read; the correct 
form of every word you wish to write is already 
in your mind; now when you are in doubt you will 
not try to think how the word is spelled; you will 
become passive and at once an impression of the 
correct spelling of the word will come to you, and 
you will write it without doubting or looking in 
the dictionary to see if it is right." The effect was 
immediate, and after two or three treatments, in 
order to show the improvement, and express her 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 153 

gratitude, she wrote me a four-page letter, with- 
out consulting the dictionary, and in which were 
only two or three slight errors in spelling. 

Her language was most markedly that of an 
uneducated person. She constantly omitted her 
final g's — said " says I," and was entirely regard- 
less of singular and plural in the use of nomina- 
tives and verbs. 

Half a dozen suggestions removed these errors 
in an astonishing manner, so that her language is 
now that of a fairly educated woman — not fault- 
less, but good. 

Coming to a different class of cases, I will 
present 

Case HI. — A little boy, seven years of age, was 
a most unhappy coward — afraid of the slightest 
pain, and a coward and cry-baby among his play- 
mates. He had some slight disease of the scalp 
which it was necessary to treat, but he would cry 
and run away the moment I entered the room. 
After one or two unhappy and only partially suc- 
cessful attempts at treatment I decided to try sug- 
gestion. Placing him in a chair opposite me, I 



154 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

took his face and head firmly between my hands, 
and putting my face near his, I commanded him 
to look steadily in my eyes. It was very difficult 
to secure his attention, but having succeeded, I 
soothed him with passes and light touches, until 
his eyelids drooped; he was perfectly quiet, sub- 
jective, and sleepy, but not asleep. I then sug- 
gested that he would no longer be a crying, whim- 
pering coward, but a strong, brave boy; that he 
would take his treatment without fear, and that 
he would stand up sturdily for his rights among 
his playfellows. This was repeated over and 
over, gently, but firmly; he all the while remain- 
ing passive and sleepy, and apparently taking no 
notice whatever of my suggestions. The next 
time I called he was shy, but not troublesome, and 
with two or three repetitions of the suggestions 
he came promptly and bravely to his treatment. 

I was also informed that the change in his man- 
ner among his playmates was equally marked; 
certainly all cringing and cowardly manner had 
disappeared, and he seemed self-reliant and happy. 

Case IV. — A little girl, five years of age, was 



USES IN EDUCATION AND MFORM, i^^ 

afflicted with night-terror. She went soundly to 
sleep when first put to bed, but after two or three 
hours she awoke screaming and trembling with 
terror, on account of the hideous black man whom 
she saw in her dream. The impression of the 
dream was vivid and persistent, and her screams 
kept the household aroused and alarmed for hours 
every night, and this state of things had already 
continued for months. One day, when she was 
perfectly bright and happy, I placed her in her 
high chair in front of me — put my hands gently 
upon her shoulders, and asked her to look steadily 
at a trinket easily in her view, and quieted her 
with passes and soothing touches until her droop- 
ing eyelids denoted the subjective condition. I 
then commenced in a gentle, sing-song manner to 
suggest that she would go easily to sleep as usual 
at night, but that she would have no frightful 
dreams, that she would see the dreadful black man 
no more, but would sleep quietly on the w^hole 
night through. This was repeated over and over 
in the same gentle manner. 

That was a year ago — she has not seen the black 



156 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

man since, and her sleep and health have been per- 
fect. There was no repetition of the treatment. 

Passing to still another class — that of sexual 
perversity — it would seem unnecessary to add 
anything to the work which has been done and 
reported by Krafft-Ebing, Von Schrenk, and 
other well-known writers. I will, however, 
briefly refer to one or two cases. 

Case V. — A tall, but pale and flabby boy, six- 
teen years of age, was, at the request of his father, 
brought to me by his teacher, on account of the 
habit of self-abuse, and also the cigarette habit. 
His memory was impaired; he was backward in 
his studies; he was dejected, dull, and unmanly. 
He was under treatment by suggestion once a 
week,, sometimes only once in two weeks, during 
two and a half months. The habit of sexual 
abuse was entirely cured in one month; the ciga- 
rette habit was reduced to a cigarette once in a 
week, sometimes only once in two weeks. His 
memory and interest in his studies were both 
greatly improved; he passed his examination with 
a percentage which quite surprised his teachers 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 157 

and friends. His father afterwards called on me 
to express his thanks, and he informed me that the 
boy, in addition to his improvement in his studies, 
had wonderfully improved in appearance, in 
brightness, self-respect, and manliness. He was 
sent to Europe to study and passed from under 
my observation. 

Case VI. — A young man, twenty-two years of 
age, came to me for treatment on account of mor- 
bid sexual ideas and practices of the homo-sexual 
type. He was small, thin, pallid, and miserable 
in appearance; without appetite, digestion, or 
energy. He could by great effort in a measure 
control his morbid actions, but his mind was con- 
stantly occupied with unclean thoughts and imag- 
inings, always having relation to persons of his 
own sex. He felt degraded by his infirmity, and 
earnestly desired to be freed from it. Having 
secured the proper hypnotic conditions, I sug- 
gested, first, improved appetite, more perfect di- 
gestion and assimilation of food and the forma- 
tion of an improved blood, so that he would be 
properly nourished in general, and especially with 



158 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

regard to his nervous system; then that all un- 
seemly practices and all vulgar and prurient 
thoughts in relation to men should be banished 
from his mind and in their place higher and nobler 
thoughts should come — and I specified subjects to 
which his thoughts would be turned. All this 
was repeated distinctly and positively over and 
over again, with intervals of perfect silence be- 
tween the suggestions. He was then awakened; 
he retained only a very dim recollection of what 
had passed; he had heard my voice, but only in 
an indistinct manner, as if far away. I told him 
to return in a week. He did so promptly, accord- 
ing to appointment; his whole aspect was 
changed; animation, hope, self-respect, were 
all apparent. He reported that his appetite and 
digestion were wonderfully improved, and that he 
was almost entirely free from his troublesome 
and disgusting instincts and imaginings. He re- 
ceived his second treatment, and has not since 
returned. 

I could easily extend the list of cases in this as 
well as other classes. I could speak of the re- 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 159 

moval of fright and nervousness from singers and 
actors, thereby securing better artistic results, and 
of the cure of that exceedingly troublesome 
and rebellious condition — ^^dominant hallucinatory 
ideas, generally associated with melancholia. 

Uniform success in these latter cases cannot be 
expected under any treatment. I will give one or 
two examples cured by suggestion. 

Case VII. — This was a young man, nineteen 
years of age, whose dominant idea had reference 
to disease. It was a paralysing fear and expecta- 
tion of being attacked by every serious ailment of 
which he heard. The idea haunted him day and 
night, suddenly overw^helming him with uncon- 
trollable terror and trembling. With this were 
also associated a deep melancholy, inability to at- 
tend to business, and frequent impulses to suicide. 
He proved to be an excellent hypnotic subject. I 
suggested the removal of all these depressing and 
abnormal ideas; that the cloud of hallucinations 
would be lifted, and that normal and cheerful 
thoughts, interest in business, and improved 
health would come. Awakened, he knew nothing 



i6o HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

of what had transpired. I simply requested him 
to return in three days. At the appointed time 
he came with a smiHng face and a confident and 
manly bearing. His first remark, when I asked 
him how he felt, was, " All the world is made over 
new to me." The whole delusion had been swept 
away, and his mind cleared and made normal in 
its action. This was nearly a year ago, and there 
has been no return of the trouble. 

The following is a case of stage fright treated 
by suggestion. 

Case IX. — Miss V. was an excellent pianist 
and teacher, but her public performances were 
marred by excessive nervousness and self -con- 
sciousness, amounting to an almost paralysing 
stage fright. While at home or only in the 
presence of friends her memory was perfect, her 
conception of the music distinct and truthful, and 
her technique gave full and brilliant expression 
to her musical ideas, but the moment she came 
before her audience in public her tribulation com- 
menced. She became nervous and confused, her 
memory and power of concentration vanished, 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. i6i 

her hands were cold and unresponsive, and for the 
first few bars it seemed as if the whole perform- 
ance must prove an absolute failure. Gradually 
a degree of composure returned, but she was 
never able to do full justice to her real talent and 
acquirements. 

She came to me for help. By hypnotism a 
perfectly quiet and subjective condition was 
secured, but without quite losing consciousness. 
I suggested that all her nervousness and self- 
consciousness would at once disappear, and would 
trouble her no more; that she would come before 
her audience with confidence and composure; she 
knew well that the compositions she was to play 
were perfectly in her memory and at her com- 
mand, and this knowledge would give her confi- 
dence. That she would lose all thought of herself 
and of her audience, and would become thor- 
oughly absorbed in the music; she would enter 
into the spirit of the different composers, her 
fingers would be responsive and give full expres- 
sion to her ideas, and her performance would be 
a brilliant success. The treatment was given 



i62 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

twice; and the suggestions were literally fulfilled. 
She came before her audience without nervous- 
ness or confusion; she entered at once upon her 
work with full control of her powers and ren- 
dered a difficult programme in a thoroughly 
artistic manner, winning the sympathy and 
enthusiastic approval of her audience. After the 
performance her former teacher came up and con- 
gratulated her, remarking at the same time — " I 
am glad to see that at last you have conquered 
that dreadful self-consciousness." 

I will add a single case of decided mental aber- 
ration. 

Case X. — Mrs. X., sixty years of age, married 
early in life, corpulent, gouty; she had excellent 
intellectual ability, and was accustomed to literary 
and artistic surroundings. This lady is the sub- 
ject of hallucination of persecution, with suspi- 
cion of servants, friends, everybody — ^but espe- 
cially of her husband. These hallucinations have 
been well marked for the past fifteen years, grow- 
ing constantly worse, but of late they have been 
of such a character that there must either be im- 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 163 

provement or an asylum. I first saw her in 
November, 1898. Her condition was deplorable. 
She was almost entirely confined to her room on 
account of her gouty condition, and so was denied 
the advantage of change of scene and proper 
exercise. The most prominent hallucination was 
the belief that a powder permeated the room; 
that it was present on the carpet, sofa, chairs, and 
all the furinture. It was supposed to be injected 
into the room by her husband — a most quiet, up- 
right, patient man, always devoted to her com- 
fort and welfare. He was not allowed to come 
often into her presence on account of her suspi- 
cion that, whenever he got behind her, he flirted 
his pocket-handkerchief out toward her, loaded 
with the dreaded powder, which at once struck 
her face on the side next to him, causing it to be- 
come red, swollen, and painful, and her eyes to 
water, smart, and burn. She would not sit either 
upon the sofa or any upholstered chair without 
first covering it with a fresh newspaper; it was 
also on carpets and rugs, causing her ankles to 
become irritated and painful Windows and 



i64 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

doors were hung with sheets to prevent the 
powder from gaining an entrance through cracks 
and keyhole. She had not worn stockings for 
months; her bed was infected with the powder, 
causing violent irritation of the skin; as she ex- 
pressed it, like lying in a nest of ants. She had 
not slept in it for months, but had lain upon a 
couch covered with newspapers, and always with 
an umbrella over her head to partly shield her 
from the powder during the night. The water 
was poisoned and caused the faucets to become 
black and her hands to crack and be painful. She 
would trust no servants — they poisoned her food. 
She would have food brought to her from any 
one place only a few times before it made her ill, 
and the place for procuring it must be changed. 
Everything that Mr. X. brought her caused her 
nausea and pain and would presently be vomited. 
She had hallucinations of touch, taste, smell, 
and also of sight, but chiefly referring to her own 
person. The powder discoloured her face and 
hands, could be seen upon the carpet and on her 
dress; putting her foot in a slipper in which she 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 165 

imagined Mr. X. had scattered the powder, gave 
her the most excruciating pain in the joint of the 
great toe, and immediately caused a decided de- 
formity — one, however, which really had existed 
for many years. She also saw her face deformed 
and her jaw projecting forward. 

She tasted the powder as being very bitter — 
an oyster bit her mouth severely, and often the 
food which she ate caused a green expectoration 
which she declared was Paris green, introduced 
with her food. 

At night she was constantly annoyed by a 
strong smell of gas and camphor-tar balls, chok- 
ing her and entirely depriving her of sleep. No 
one else could detect it. She imagined all these 
strange things happened to her through the direct 
influence of her husband. She did not hesitate 
to express her suspicion, and she began to talk 
of retaliation in a way which seemed likely at 
any time to result in crime. 

She was indeed most unhappy on account of 
these supposed persecutions, considered herself 
the greatest martyr that had ever existed, and 



i66 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

herself most forbearing in her treatment of those 
who were causing her all this misery. 

Her never-ceasing accusations and blame of 
her husband for her troubles and suffering during 
all these fifteen years had at times rendered his 
life almost unendurable. 

Such was her condition and these were only a 
part of her delusions. She talked and thought 
of little else; they simply filled her mind. To her, 
all was very real and her misery was propor- 
tionably great. 

At my first visit I listened patiently to the re- 
cital of all her troubles and told her I believed 
she suffered just as she had explained to me, but 
that I did not think the cause of her suffering was 
altogether the powder, but that the irritation of 
her feet and ankles was caused by poor circula- 
tion of the blood; that she must keep her feet ele- 
vated, and I would give her a remedy to increase 
the force of the circulation and also a wash. I 
told her very positively that there would be great 
improvement in two days. So it proved, and 
though we were utter strangers she directly 



USES m EDUCATION AND REFORM. 167 

began to trust me and look upon me as her 
friend. 

I then began quietly to express my doubts 
about the bad effect of the powder generally, and 
to insinuate that much of her trouble was due to 
something else — something within herself; she 
listened with the greatest interest, but could not 
understand how such decided physical sensations 
could be anything else but true. However, I had 
introduced a new thought and she did not alto- 
gether reject it. 

I then told her distinctly that there was nO' 
powder about, except the ordinary dust of the at- 
mosphere; that no one was injecting it; that 
the most expert chemists and microscopists in the 
city could not find either poison or dust; that Mr. 
X. was as innocent of causing her trouble as the 
angel Gabriel; he only desired her comfort and 
well-being. I declared that she was accusing 
him wrongfully, and if he sometimes lost self-con- 
trol for a moment and said hard things it was 
only what might be expected ; human nature could 
not endure such constant unjust accusations every 



i6S HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

day and hour for fifteen years and always main- 
tain its equal poise; that his sufferings had been 
great as well as hers, and she must consider that 
also. 

She listened with surprise; she did not accept 
fully all I had said, but again I had introduced a 
new train of thought and she was able to reason 
about it. Each time I saw her I emphasised these 
thoughts; I sat opposite her, grasped her wrists 
firmly and made her look steadfastly in my face; 
my earnestness overwhelmed her; gradually her 
own set look of defiance and incredulity relaxed, 
her face glowed with the excitement of a new 
thought received and, for the time being at least, 
she accepted what I so earnestly affirmed. 

What still troubled her most was her sensa- 
tions. She wished to believe, but how could she 
when all her sensations contradicted what she 
would believe? 

Naturally, Mrs. X. was a person of refinement, 
of excellent intellectual power, well educated, and 
a sound reasoner even now from her premisses; 
she was also an excellent whist- and chess-player, 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 169 

holding her own with the very best amateurs and 
semi-professionals, though she had not how 
played for a long time. I took advantage of her 
general intelligence and began to explain to her 
the possibility of the senses being deceived; told 
her of the subconscious mind and its power to pro- 
duce physical sensations, and even physical 
changes. I told her about stigmatisation and the 
production of blisters and other physical changes 
by suggestion while the patient was in the hyp- 
notic sleep; in short I showed her distinctly that 
the mind, especially the subconscious mind, could 
do just what was being done in her case, and that 
the senses were often deceived just as hers were 
now. This work occupied months — spending an 
hour once a week, or once in two weeks, at my 
own convenience. In the meantime some prac- 
tical results had been attained. I had by repeated 
suggestion broken the force of the powder halluci- 
nation; that being so, there was no need of the 
sheets which had still been hanging at windows 
and doors, so now they disappeared; the umbrella 
was also laid aside. The matter of sleeping in 



170 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION 

her bed was then taken up. I assured her there 
was now nothing wrong with the bed, and that 
she could sleep in it with perfect comfort and 
safety. I smoothed it over with my hands, 
assured her that it was perfectly free from every 
bad influence, and that she would sleep in it com- 
fortably and without any sign of her old-time 
irritation of the skin. She did, in fact, occupy 
it that night with perfect comfort, and has done 
so ever since. The newspaper also disappeared 
from her chair and couch. 

Some of the physical sensations were more ob- 
stinate, and her suspicions of Mr. X. and her 
friends generally, though greatly weakened, were 
not so easily disposed of; nevertheless much had 
been gained ; her mind was working in new chan- 
nels, and her conversation on general topics 
was sound and interesting. She played games, 
read and was interested in current news and 
events. 

By this time she had become familiarised with 
the idea of hypnotism, and I had impressed upon 
her the advantage it might be to her. She was 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 171 

reluctant, however, to submit to it, but she thought 
it would be an excellent thing for Mr. X. He 
was perfectly willing and, though already past 
seventy, he proved to be an excellent subject. He 
was hypnotised in the presence of his wife and 
was greatly benefited. Suggestion removed the 
excessive mental tension occasioned by the condi- 
tion of Mrs. X. and made it much easier for him 
to be attentive and helpful to her; it also gave him 
new strength and more confidence in himself, both 
of which were much needed. She saw that only 
good results followed the treatment, and she soon 
consented to receive it herself. 

She also proved to be a good subject and went 
quickly into the deep sleep, in which I allowed her 
to remain fifteen or twenty minutes without any 
important suggestions, and then awoke her. The 
sleep had been very deep — so deep as almost to 
alarm her — and it took several minutes thor- 
oughly to arouse her. But a point had been 
gained — she could be hypnotised — and from this 
time on still more important advantage was 
gained by suggestions made in the hypnotic con- 



172 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

dition. Purposely only slight sleep was at first 
induced, during which her respiration, colour, 
and heart's action were all improved. I now 
commenced to attack the illusions of the senses. 
The sensation of disagreeable odours and the con- 
sequent choking at night were rapidly dispelled, 
and have not returned. She had for years been 
accustomed to sleep with her room door locked, 
bolted, and blockaded, greatly to the annoyance 
of the family, who had no means of entrance, no 
matter how serious her condition might be; by 
suggestion she was induced to remove obstruc- 
tions and give Mr. X. a duplicate key. 

Gradually her feelings toward Mr. X. under- 
went a change; her former affection returned, and 
she had an intellectual belief that he had nothing 
to do with the annoyances from which she still 
sometimes suffered. A part of the time at least 
the food which he brought her was taken without 
suspicion, was retained and digested; but this 
was not always the case. She still feels a certain 
fear of Mr. X., lest the malign influence which 
she has so long associated with him may still be 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 173 

exercised; but her general attitude toward him 
is entirely changed. 

She now perfectly understands her condition — 
knows that it is a mental disease; but on account 
of what has already been done she looks for- 
ward with great interest and hope to an entire 
cure. 

She looks back with horror upon her wretched 
condition when I first saw her — ^though she 
laughs at the ridiculous things she did. She says 
her sufferings at that time were intense and she 
really thought she was the most abused person in 
the world. Comparing her condition then and 
her bearable and sometimes even enjoyable con- 
dition now, she is thankful and hopeful. At all 
events a family which had never a moment of 
peace or freedom from anxiety, had never a res- 
pite from accusation and blame, has now com- 
parative comfort. Much of the time there is 
sympathy and enjoyment. Improvement is still 
going on, and there is an excellent prospect that, 
with continued care and effort, improvement will 
continue. 



174 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

Altogether it seems to me to be a fair example 
of the educational effect of hypnotism and sug- 
gestion upon a seemingly hopeless case of mental 
alienation. 

In these cases as well as some of those re- 
counted in the foregoing chapter the treatment 
was essentially educational — the dismissal of the 
abnormal, hurtful, or evil ideas and tendencies, 
and the introduction of new, normal, and helpful 
ones in their place. Sometimes a single treat- 
ment has sufficed, and sometimes a long series of 
carefully considered and painstaking efforts was 
necessary. In the latter case the true educational 
uses of hypnotism and suggestion are even more 
evident than when very sudden changes take place, 
and the results achieved are more likely to be per- 
manent. 

In hypnotism, then, we have a most efficient aid 
in mental and moral as well as physical ailments, 
but unfortunately the indifference and prejudice, 
both in and out of the profession, which still pre- 
vail, regarding this agent, are a bar to the vast 
amount of good which might otherwise be ac- 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 175 

complished by it. It must also be acknowledged 
that the number of men thoroughly qualified by 
character, education, and experience to do this 
work well, and upon a larger scale, is still limited; 
nevertheless good and efficient men in asylums 
for inebriates and the insane, as well as in private 
practice, are gradually discovering the great ad- 
vantage to be derived from this method of treat- 
ment. Let them report their cases, and by and 
by their combined influence will be felt, preju- 
dice will be removed, and punitive and reforma- 
tory institutions of every kind will be open to 
thoroughly accredited and appointed physicians 
for the treatment of proper cases among their in- 
mates by this newer method. Unvarying success 
may not be attained, but there will be a great gain 
in uprooting evil habits and criminal tendencies. 
These conditions are often the direct result of 
prenatal influences, but even so, no agent nor 
influence known has proved so effective in ac- 
complishing reforms and developing a normal 
and useful character and life. At present the 
managers of these institutions are inclined to turn 



176 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

away from those desiring to work in this direc- 
tion, and so ignorance, personal prejudice, re- 
ligious scruples and bigotry shut out from them 
one of the grandest instruments of reform and 
development, in those almost hopeless cases, that 
have yet been brought to the notice of philan- 
thropists and educators. 

The ethical aspect of the subject is reserved 
for a future chapter, but it may be here remarked 
in reply to some criticisms, that individuality is 
not destroyed nor weakened, but often greatly 
strengthened by the treatment. The character 
of the boy in whom the desire for cigarette-smok- 
ing or petty stealing, lying or gambling, has been 
dismissed and better ideals introduced, has lost 
nothing of force or individuality; it has only been 
improved and turned to better account. Self- 
control has not been diminished, but, on the con- 
trary, the patient has been made able to do the 
thing which in his best moments he desired to do, 
but was not able to accomplish unaided. As for 
imbecility and susceptibility to evei-y fleeting im- 
pulse or idea — even when daily hypnotisation for 



USES IN EDUCATION AND REFORM. 177 

clinical or experimental purposes has been in- 
dulged in, no harm to the patient's intellect has 
been observed, and when judiciously employed 
for therapeutic or educational purposes, only im- 
provement in intellectual force and acumen has 
resulted. If too great susceptibility occurs in 
any given case, if the hyphotiser knows his work 
and is conscientious in doing it, it can be dimin- 
ished or entirely dismissed by suggestion, or, 
properly modified, it may be made available for 
healthful and useful purposes. 

Such is an imperfect statement of the possi- 
bilities connected with the use of hypnotic sug- 
gestion as an element in education. My own ex- 
perience in many interesting cases, as well as the 
recorded observation of others, has led me to be- 
lieve that these possibilities have yet only begun 
to be appreciated or their value and wide range 
of application suspected, and that the next half 
century will see newer, truer, more harmonious, as 
well as more scientific, views regarding hypnotism 
itself among those who make it a study; that the 
prejudice on the part of the public, which is now 



17S HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

a bar to its usefulness, will disappear; and that 
new uses, therapeutic, psychic, and educational, 
will be discovered, which will place it among the 
most highly prized agents for good in use among 
intelligent well-wishers of humanity. 



CHAPTER V. 

FORMS OF SUGGESTION USEFUL IN THE TREAT- 
MENT OF INEBRIETY. 

In proportion as the nature and uses of hyp- 
notism and hypnotic suggestion become known 
and realised, are their uses also being extended in 
the treatment of diseased conditions; and espe- 
cially is this noticeable in the treatment of certain 
forms of insanity and of inebriety. 

With all new unfamiliar agents there may be 
wise and unwise methods of application; it is 
proper, therefore, to call attention to some of the 
ways by which those here under consideration 
may be most advantageously used, particularly in 
the treatment of inebriety. 

As the different stages of inebriety demand dif- 
ferent medical treatment and management, so the 
methods of suggestion applicable in their treat- 
ment vary, according to the stage of the disease 



J So HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

and the condition of the patient, nor in any stage 
is it necessary to forego methods of medical treat- 
ment which have been proved to be of genuine 
service, such as the purge and baths in acute alco- 
hoHsm and tonics in the stage of reaction and 
prostration; but that hypnotism and suggestion 
will often be found to be most valuable allies to 
these more usual and well-known means of cure 
will hardly be doubted by any one who has ob- 
served their effects. 

For the purpose here intended the subject may 
be examined under three heads, viz. : ( i ) Direct 
Suggestion; (2) Suggestion directed to physio- 
logical processes; (3) Auto-Suggestion. 

In the acute stage of inebriety, when the patient 
is still drinking, or has recently been doing so, 
what we will designate as the direct method of 
suggestion will be found most useful. For this 
purpose bring the patient into the best hypnotic or 
subjective condition which it is possible to secure, 
and then suggest directly and positively, though 
not necessarily in a loud, and certainly not in a 
startling, tone of voice, that alcoholic drink is his 



TREATMENT OF INEBRIETY. i8i 

worst and most dangerous enemy — ^that he knows 
this very well, and that his whole will and desire 
is to be free from that enemy's power, and that 
he will be free. Suggest that his appetite and 
desire for the drink are even now leaving him, and 
that in future he will shun and refuse it in every 
form and under all circumstances ; that it will even 
disgust and nauseate him. Suggest that he will 
not suffer from nervousness, nor hallucinations, 
nor disturbing visions, but that his mind will be 
calm and hopeful, and he will sleep quietly and 
be refreshed. Keep the patient in this deep sleep 
or subjective condition, as the case may be, for an 
hour if possible ; repeating at intervals the sugges- 
tions, and repeating the whole process in twelve 
or twenty-four hours. If the first attempt at 
treatment does not succeed, a later one may prove 
more fortunate. 

In the second stage of the disease, when the 
drink or drug habit has temporarily at least been 
abandoned, but the patient is suffering from the 
after effects of the poison — when the nervous sys- 
tem is prostrated, changes more or less profound 



1 82 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

and injurious have occurred in the cells of the 
brain and spinal cord, so that their action is ab- 
normal or imperfect, vitality is lowered, the will 
power weakened; nutrition also, the very process 
by which alone these damaged cells can be per- 
manently repaired and vitality restored has been 
interfered with, the mucous membrane of the 
stomach and intestinal canal is congested, and its 
functions weakened or perhaps temporarily para- 
lysed or destroyed — of what use can hypnotism 
and suggestion then be? 

As already intimated, the general feeling in the 
profession is that the use of hypnotism is very 
limited — that its main field of usefulness is in so- 
called nervous or imaginary diseases; but if the 
reports of eminent foreign observers, such as 
Liebeault, Bernheim, Liegois, Montpallier, Borru, 
Krafft-Ebing, Delbeuf, and others, as well as 
those which I have myself recently made, can be 
trusted, then physiological effects of the most 
positive and practical character are frequently 
realised from hypnotic suggestion. These re- 
sults have been already enumerated. It is not 



TREATMENT OF INEBRIETY. 183 

claimed that they can be obtained in every case, 
nor even in a majority of cases, but they have 
been obtained in cases sufficiently numerous to 
establish the fact that suggestion in the hypnotic 
condition is capable of influencing physiological 
processes to a very remarkable degree. 

Applying this knowledge to the treatment of 
alcoholism or drug addiction in the second stage, 
as above described, most important aid may often 
be obtained. Let it be suggested, for instance, 
that the congestion or inflammation of the mu- 
cous membrane of the stomach will rapidly di- 
minish, and the function of digestion will be re- 
stored; that food will be desired, will be retained 
and digested ; that the process of assimilation will 
go on normally, a pure and wholesome blood will 
be elaborated and will be distributed to the brain, 
the spinal cord, and nervous system generally, so 
that each diseased and enfeebled cell will be nour- 
ished, repaired, and stimulated to renewed, nor- 
mal activity, and that the whole system will in like 
manner be nourished, strengthened, and renewed. 
It may also be suggested that the intellect and the 



iS4 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

moral sentiments will be strengthened or im- 
proved if deficient, and the will be made energetic 
in executing the behests of the intellect. 

No miraculous, nor even marvellous, results 
may follow in any given case, but at all events 
the mind of the patient, even if remaining con- 
scious, is put in a favourable condition and atti- 
tude for improvement, and the suggestions them- 
selves thus prove helpful in a way which every 
physician appreciates, and if the unconscious state 
be secured or even a semi-conscious or subjective 
one, we then invoke the aid of the subconscious 
mind or subliminal self — an ally whose good 
offices we are only now beginning to understand 
and appreciate. 

Finally, the effects of Auto-Suggestion should 
not be lost sight of. Generally they are little con- 
sidered, but a moment's thought will disclose to 
us an influence which cannot be ignored. As an 
example of its power, witness the hundred or 
more cases of stigmatisation which have been 
reported, from St. Francis of Assisi in the thir- 
teenth century to Louise Lateau at the present 



TREATMENT OF INEBRIETY. 185 

time. These cases have been looked upon with 
suspicion or absolute incredulity by scientific in- 
vestigators, as instances of self-deception or in- 
tentional fraud. They have been so looked upon 
not because of lack of evidence that such condi- 
tions actually existed, nor because they were easily 
explained upon known principles, nor yet because 
they had been proved fraudulent, but because it 
was believed that they could not be explained at 
all excepting upon the supposition of a super- 
natural influence or force having been concerned 
in their production — a supposition which, of 
course, threw them out of the category of sub- 
jects amenable to scientific treatment. But tak- 
ing into account the power of the subliminal self 
and the known instances of physiological changes 
which have been produced by suggestion, and 
placing auto-suggestion in the place of suggestion 
received from another person, these cases of 
stigmatisation fall naturally into the same cate- 
gory. The recluse or religious enthusiast, with 
physical force greatly diminished by fasting and 
vigils — ^by intense concentration of the mind upon 



1 86 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

the sufferings of Christ and the mental picture of 
his five wounds, passes into a condition analogous 
to trance — a self -induced hypnotic or subjective 
state, in which the picture so vividly impressed 
upon the mind is realised upon corresponding por- 
tions of the patient's own body; deep red marks 
appear, or blood oozes from the hands, the feet, 
and the side, at points corresponding to the mental 
picture which had so deeply impressed the dev- 
otee. 

Analogous to these most striking, though less 
frequently observed examples of auto-suggestion, 
are the multitude of cases where a dominant idea, 
presented during moments of profound mental 
excitement, becomes a potent factor in causing 
most radical changes in the action, life, and char- 
acter of the person so impressed. The condition 
of mind favourable for receiving such potent im- 
pressions may be brought about in many and vari- 
ous ways — by the grandeur of architectural 
effects, decorations, music, ceremonials, and the 
associations of churches and cathedrals; by im- 
passioned oratory, or the sympathetic action in- 



TREATMENT OF INEBRIETY. 1S7 

duced by a multitude of persons swayed by some 
common sentiment or emotion, as of patriotism, 
reform, or religion. Such conditions were the 
foundation of many of the epidemic excitements 
and delusions which flourished during the Middle 
Ages — the crusades, the flagellants, the dancers, 
and the horrors of witchcraft, and in later times 
the trances, ecstasies, sudden conversions and 
reformations associated with temperance and 
other reform movements, and especially with re- 
ligious revivals. 

That dominant ideas entertained in times of 
such high mental tension often become realised in 
a most remarkable manner is undoubtedly true, 
and the semi-hypnotic condition of intense con- 
centration upon a single idea, into which such 
men as Wesley, Gough, or Moody have, by their 
peculiar power and eloquence, been able to throw 
large audiences, has in particular instances been 
utilised for good, and many an inebriate and many 
a slave to hurtful and degrading vices and sins 
under this subtle influence has, without reason, 
will, conscious effort, or even resolution of his 



i8S HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

own, become changed, then and there, in character 
and action. 

That these sudden changes are always perma- 
nent is, unfortunately, not true; and the effect of 
the highly wrought excitement upon those who 
go back to their old life may be a matter for con- 
sideration, but that the key to these profound 
changes is to be found in suggestion under the 
influence of a dominant idea and favouring con- 
ditions of mind can hardly be doubted. 

As an aid in the treatment of inebriety, auto- 
suggestion plays a subordinate part; nevertheless 
it also has its experimental uses. Let the patient, 
already anxious for improvement, be impressed 
with the idea that his recovery will be much in- 
fluenced by his own mental attitude — that if it is 
positive and hopeful he will recover his health 
much more easily and rapidly than if it is de- 
spondent or indifferent, and that in this matter 
he can greatly assist himself. This being im- 
pressed, teach him, with earnestness and sincerity, 
to affirm to himself constantly, and especially 
while going to sleep, ideas like the following, ex- 



TREATMENT OF INEBRIETY. 189 

pressed in such language as the physician thinks 
advisable: "The power of the alcohol habit (or 
drug habit) is broken; I am sufficiently strong, 
and my will is sufficiently firm to resist success- 
fully every temptation ; no influence can make my 
hand carry the poison to my lips. I shall gain 
strength and self-control through sleep; I shall 
rapidly and perfectly recover." 

But let the conscientious physician ever bear in 
mind this fact : if the case is chronic, or if it has 
been characterised by periodical attacks of dipso- 
mania which the patient either has not desired 
or has not been able to control — unless the morale 
of the man is strengthened and his ideals elevated, 
sooner or later he will return to his besetting vice. 
Herein lie the fallacy and comparative useless- 
ness of the various vaunted " cures " for 
inebriety, and especially those having drugs of 
any kind for a basis. Here and there, doubtless, 
a man being once helped to gain self-control, and 
to shake himself free from his bondage, having 
experienced the evil which that bondage brings, 
is wise enough and strong enough, thereafter to 



I90 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION 

successfully resist; but the great majority fail and 
are overborne — the unfortunate is only tempo- 
rarily helped. The trouble is that the man re- 
mains the same; he is hampered and handicapped 
by the same weaknesses, the same lack of initi- 
ative, of personality, of moral stamina — and un- 
less this is taken into account by the physician and 
to some degree at least remedied, the treatment, 
whatever its form, is likely to prove a failure. 

Here then is the real work of the physician — to 
implant higher ideals in the mind of the patient- 
help him to see them, appreciate and desire them, 
and then to rise toward them. 

So often, also, there is depression, discourage- 
ment, distrust as to the value of life; the man 
would prefer to go to sleep and never wake. 
Self-indulgence has weakened his moral fibre, so 
that his attitude is one of absolute indifference; 
he has lost the power of initiative^ — he has lost 
self-control, manhood, the respect of others, and 
worst of all his own self-respect. Can these 
qualities be restored ? and what method is best ? 

First of all, restore or create in him some de- 



TREATMENT OF INEBRIETY. 191 

gree, at least, of self-confidence; without that all 
efforts will fail — with that wonders can be accom- 
plished. Assure the patient that he has forces 
within himself abundantly sufficient to keep him 
safe and free from his enemy and raise his life to 
a better, higher plane; forces which have always 
been in him, but which he has never recognised 
nor used; now there is need to use them and he 
will be able to use them efficiently. Tell him he 
is not altogether bad nor altogether helpless ; there 
are still strength, dignity, and manhood in him; 
all that is needed is to give them an opportunity 
to show themselves. It is the drink that has 
kept manhood and self-respect bound and thrust 
below out of sight; but manhood and self-respect 
are still there, waiting to be released and cleansed 
after their wretched imprisonment — waiting to 
resume their own beautiful functions. Say to 
him, " You still possess these higher qualities 
which seemed to be lost, and which you were 
careless of possessing; you never knew be- 
fore how valuable and how beautiful they are, 
and how divine — but you begin to see now, and 



192 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

to feel how even the thought of them is putting 
you on a vantage ground. You begin to see what 
a relentless tyrant you have been serving and how 
vile and degrading was the bondage from which 
you are escaping, and you detest it; you look 
down from your present vantage ground upon 
your former selfish and debased manner of life 
and say ' was I ever that man ? ' 

*' Now the power of your enemy is broken — yon 
are the master, for you have found out your own 
strength. Manhood, self-respect, thoughtfulness 
and care for others — you see now how beautiful, 
how divine they are — and you know and feel that 
never again must they be degraded. When you 
see this all your ideals, all your thought of life 
and of your own part in it will be changed and 
elevated : you will take up your responsibilities as 
a man and rejoice in them. You are a stronger 
man because you recognise the source and quality 
of your strength; you recognise and appreciate 
those higher faculties which all the while were 
lying hidden within yourself. 

" Perhaps you have been admonished that you 



TREATMENT OF INEBRIETY. 193 

are sinful, vile, and helpless by nature; that 
thought has been outgrown — your nature is 
divine, and recognising that truth you have a new 
source of strength ; you walk abroad with dignity 
and confidence. Your course is no longer down- 
ward toward degradation, but upward toward 
light and beauty and usefulness." 

Some patients are prepared to receive these 
suggestions in their normal state; they receive 
them joyfully, and the plain thought so presented 
becomes a part of the patient's own mind, his 
habit of thought, the thought from which he acts ; 
others need to have the ignorance, indifference, or 
vulgarity of the ordinary, conscious mind first put 
in abeyance by the health-giving and elevating in- 
fluence of hypnotism. The patient then recog- 
nises that which is good and receives sugges- 
tions of strength, manhood, and a nobler life. 

But again let it be noted that this whole process 
is educational — a process of evolution and eleva- 
tion, and no single lesson will suffice to make it 
eft'ective and permanent. It must be repeated 
and repeated — then time must elapse — ^not too 



194 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

long, but varying according to the circumstances 
and needs of the patient, and then the lesson must 
be reinforced in terms which seem most needed 
in each patient's case, until the alcoholic disease 
has disappeared, healthful mental and physical 
conditions prevail, and the man walks securely in 
his new path — strong because he has been taught 
to believe in the best that is in him. 

Such is a mere outline of a subject which in my 
judgment is fraught with interest of a most prac- 
tical character, and should claim the serious con- 
sideration of every physician, and especially of 
every one whose work lies particularly among 
the unfortunate victims of alcohol and drugs, or 
the insane; not with the idea of speedy and radical 
changes in their management, nor of finding a 
panacea, but of careful study and experiment as 
favourable opportunities occur, with the hope of 
securing another useful agent for his armamen- 
tarium. 



CHAPTER VI. 

SIX MISCELLANEOUS CASES TREATED BY HYP- 
NOTISM WITHOUT SUGGESTION. 

The following cases were treated before the 
Bernheim period of suggestion had arrived, by 
simply hypnotising the patient by passes and the 
steady gaze. No audible suggestions whatever 
were made either as regards sleep or the cure of 
disease. A report of these cases was read before 
the Neurological Section of the New York 
Academy of Medicine, October 12th, 1888; and, so 
far as the writer knows, they constituted the first 
series of cases treated by h3^pnotism reported be- 
fore any medical society in New York or in the 
United States. 

They are as follows : 

Case I. — Mrs. B.,aged twenty-eight years, born 
in New York, slight figure, blonde, good constitu- 
tion, married very early in life and has four chil- 
195 



196 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

dren. She had no organic disease, but was worn 
out with care and trouble. She had constant 
neuralgic pain, was unable to take food in suffi- 
cient quantities for proper nutrition; there were 
great debility and nervous prostration and fre- 
quent attacks of syncope. Ordinary remedies 
seemed to be of little avail. 

In April, 1870, one day when she was particu- 
larly wretched, I said to her, '' I believe if you 
could be hypnotised it would be the most useful 
thing that could be done." She readily gave her 
consent, and she was among my earliest cases 
treated by hypnotism. 

She was sitting on an ordinary chair; I seated 
myself opposite, took her thumbs and held them 
lightly opposite my own, and desired her to look 
steadily and quietly at a specified button on my 
coat. In less than a minute her eyelids quivered 
and drooped, and in six minutes she was in a pro- 
found sleep. I noticed her pulse, which was per- 
fectly normal, and her respiration, which was full 
and quiet without being unusually deep. I 
pinched her wrists severely without eliciting the 



TREATMENT WITHOUT SUGGESTION, tgf 

least sign of sensation. I then simply sat and 
watched her a full half hour. At the end of that 
time I attempted to arouse her by ordinary means, 
such as pinching, slapping her face, and vigor- 
ously rubbing her ears, but without the slightest 
effect; she slept on as placidly as if I had been try- 
ing to soothe instead of arouse her. I then made 
three or four rapid passes upward over her face 
and forehead, but without contact, when she at 
once opened her eyes and looked about with a 
dreamy expression. A few more passes restored 
her perfectly to her normal condition. Upon 
being asked how she felt she seemed suddenly to 
realise that she was free from pain, and exclaimed 
in a surprised way : '' Splendidly ! I have no pain 
and I feel so rested^ — as though I had had two or 
three good nights' sleep, all in one.'* 

This patient was hypnotised ten or twelve times 
during the following two months, always with the 
same pleasant effect and with great improvement 
in her general health. In order to test the degree 
of anaesthesia while in the hypnotic condition, 
on one occasion, while she was asleep I passed a 



iqS hypnotism and suggestion. 

small sewing needle through the lobe of the ear 
and allowed it to remain. On awakening her I 
engaged her in conversation, and she did not 
notice the needle until her attention was called 
to it. 

Case II. — Miss M. M., a teacher in one of the 
public schools, of Irish parentage, twenty-two 
years old, of dark complexion and rather pasty 
and unhealthy appearance. 

I first saw this patient on July 13th, 1870. She 
was lying upon a sofa — her hair and dress in 
great disorder, and her whole appearance per- 
fectly wild. She w^as startled by the slightest 
sound, and every few minutes she screamed out 
at the top of her voice and with the most horror- 
stricken look, at some fearful vision which was 
before her and in which she saw a dear friend, 
who was at that moment sitting by her side, fall 
from some high place, bruised and mangled in 
a shocking manner. A similar state of things 
continued during the three following days, when 
rather suddenly paralysis appeared. It was 
crossed, affecting the right side of the face and the 



TREATMENT WITHOUT SUGGESTION. 199 

left arm and leg. Speech was very difficult and 
the affected limbs were nearly powerless. 

July 1 8th the case was seen in consultation with 
a well-known physician of this city, but the diag- 
nosis between a clot and hysteria, as the probable 
cause of the paralysis, was not clearly made. Six 
days later there was some slight improvement in 
the general condition of the patient, but the 
screaming fits and dreadful visions continued to 
occur. She also had attacks of loss of conscious- 
ness, lasting sometimes two hours, without mo- 
tion, except some very slight spasmodic action. 
Paralysis remained the same as at first, except- 
ing slight improvement in speech. 

July 28th. There is very little change. The 
patient can sit up, appears rational, can get across 
the room by having another person hold her up 
on the affected side; she drags the paralysed foot 
after her, the ankle turning in or out just as a 
little weight might happen to fall upon it; the 
hand also is almost powerless. 

Decided to try hypnotism. Made use of the 
long passes from head to foot for five minutes, 



200 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

then by holding the thumbs and directing the 
patient to look steadily at a specified object. 
There was a good deal of nervous agitation and 
twisting of the hands; she felt a sensation like an 
electric current passing up through her hand and 
arms. She began to be sleepy in five or six 
minutes; eyelids quivered and began to droop, 
and very soon she went to sleep, but there was still 
some nervous action of the hands. She slept 
fifteen minutes and then awoke suddenly; she 
smiled, looked much brighter, and declared she 
felt greatly rested and refreshed, as though she 
had had two nights' sleep. 

July 31st. Patient is decidedly better — has had 
no attacks of screaming nor unconsciousness. 
The paralysis is the same as before. Hypnotised 
by holding the thumbs, and the steady gaze. 
She slept as on the former occasion, but much 
more quietly. During the sleep I made a single 
firm, rapid pass down the outside of the paralysed 
leg, from above the knee to the foot. The pa- 
tient awoke suddenly with a start and an excla- 
mation. She asked in a stern manner what I 



TREATMENT WITHOUT SUGGESTION. 201 

had done to her leg — declared that I had cut it, 
and looked suspiciously around for the knife. I 
assured her that her leg was not cut, and that no 
instrument of any kind had been used. I then 
asked her to try to move her limb. She moved 
it readily. She then put her hand down and 
pinched the affected leg, exclaiming with great 
surprise and delight : " and I can feel too." I 
made a few more passes down the affected side, 
and then, giving her my hand, I asked her to rise. 
She did so and stood, bearing her weight fairly 
upon both feet. She then took a step or two, very 
hesitatingly at first, as if doubting her ability to 
do it, but at last she walked all around the room, 
unassisted, as well as though nothing had been 
the matter; every trace of paralysis had disap- 
peared and did not return. 

August 1st. Patient walked into the room un- 
assisted, looked bright, had slept well; but there 
was still a strangeness in her look, and her friends 
reported that, unlike her manner when well, she 
was petulant, fault-finding, and unreasonable. 

Hypnotised. She went to sleep as usual, and 



202 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

after allowing her to sleep a short time, I made 
two or three rapid passes upward across her fore- 
head to arouse her. 

She awoke suddenly and complained of pain in 
her head, which however soon passed away; and, 
on being asked how she felt, replied in a slow, 
doubtful way : '' I wonder how people feel who 
have been in a trance. I feel as though I must 
have been in a trance." Then, as if suddenly real- 
ising her surroundings, she exclaimed, " How did 
I come to be in this room, and why am I in this 
horrid dress ? " And she went on to say she 
should have been in the room where I found her 
the evening of my first visit, and described the 
dress she then wore as the one she should have on 
now. In short, she had no recollection of any- 
thing that had occurred since the evening of July 
13th, the day she was taken sick; she calls that 
yesterday. 

August 2nd. Patient has slept well and has 
apparently been clear in mind. 

August 1 2th. Patient has not seemed so well; 
is again strange, petulant, and unreasonable. 



TREATMENT WITHOUT SUGGESTION. 203 

She reads, writes, and amuses herself, but has not 
been altogether natural since the 2nd of the 
month. 

Hypnotised, and after a short sleep awoke her 
by passes across the forehead. 

The whole time since August ist is a blank; she 
calls to-day Friday, July 15th. She was taken 
sick on Wednesday, July 13th; the day I awoke 
her first is Thursday, and to-day is Friday. It is 
all right to her that way and no other. 

From this time on there were no further mani- 
festations of the peculiarities which had charac- 
terised her illness, nor any further lapses in time; 
she was, however, under observation for several 
weeks, and I also gave her occasional treatment by 
hypnotism. 

During this later stage of her case and after all 
abnormal conditions had apparently ceased, I be- 
came convinced that my patient was still what 
might be called ''a sensitive"; and in order to 
test the point I instituted several experiments. I 
will describe two of them. 

First: Taking an old-fashioned copper cent — 



204 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

that coin had not then entirely disappeared — I 
wrapped it neatly in a bit of ordinary tissue paper; 
this was folded in another covering of the same 
material, and so on until it had acquired six entire 
coverings of tissue paper and was a little soft, 
oval, innocent looking package, quite suitable for 
my purpose. This I took with me, held closely 
in the palm of my right hand as I entered the 
room where my patient was lying on a couch. I 
took a chair as I passed in, and placing it beside 
the couch, I sat leisurely down and took her right 
hand in mine in such a manner that the little 
package was between our hands, in close contact 
with her palm as well as my own. I remarked 
upon the weather, and commenced the routine 
duty of feeling her pulse with my left hand. A 
minute or two was passed in banter and conversa- 
tion intended thoroughly to engage her attention, 
when all at once she commenced to wipe her 
mouth with her handkerchief and spit and splutter 
with her tongue and lips, as if to get rid of some 
offensive taste. She then looked up suspiciously 
at me and said, '' I wonder what you are doing 



TREATMENT WITHOUT SUGGESTION. 205 

with me now " ; then suddenly snatching her hand 
away from mine she exclaimed, '' I know what it 
is — you have put a nasty piece of copper in my 
hand." 

Second: I took two new clean bottles, exactly 
alike, with new corks, and put a small dot of 
ink in the centre of one cork, so as to be able to 
distinguish it. I then filled the bottle with the 
unmarked cork with plain Croton water from the 
hydrant in my office. Immediately after I drew 
a goblet of water from the same faucet, and plac- 
ing it on my desk, I brought all my fingers to- 
gether in a clump and held them for a minute or 
two over the goblet, as near as possible to the 
water, but without the slightest contact. It was 
this with which I filled the second bottle, having 
the dot in the cork. I then wrapped the bottles 
separately in thick white paper, put them in a 
satchel and took them with me on my visit to the 
patient. During the visit I produced the bottles, 
taking care that my patient did not see them, 
much less distinguish the corks. I then poured 
out a small quantity of the plain water and asked 



2o6 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

her to taste it, which she did. I asked her what 
she supposed it to be; she repHed that she could 
taste nothing but simple water. I then took a 
portion of the water from the marked bottle and 
desired her to taste it, and on asking her the same 
question she replied that that also was water, but 
that it was peculiar; it was not exactly like 
aerated water, but that conveyed the best idea she 
was able to give of how it differed from the plain 
water. It had a sparkle, which she felt on her 
tongue and all the way down as it passed into 
her stomach. No matter how or when or in what 
order the two waters were given she never failed 
to distinguish which it was, and she always de- 
scribed the difference in the same way. 

I will add by way of parenthesis that I have 
had other patients who could distinguish " mag- 
netised water," as it has been called, from water 
not so treated; one especially, at the Colored 
Home and Hospital in New York. The water 
was treated as above described and left with the 
house physician, who made the experiment in my 
absence — and with perfect success; the patient de- 



TREATMENT WITHOUT SUGGESTION. 207 

scribing her sensations on tasting the magnetised 
water, in ahnost the same words as in the case 
above recorded. 

Case III. — A. C.,* a young girl of Irish parent- 
age, aged fifteen years. I first saw the patient 
December 4th, 1872. She was then having fre- 
quent epileptic attacks, characterised by sudden 
loss of consciousness, convulsions, foaming at the 
mouth, biting the tongue, and dark colour. She 
had her first attack in July, nearly six months be- 
fore I saw her, and these attacks had increased in 
severity and frequency, until now they occurred 
twenty or more times a day, some lasting fifteen 
or twenty minutes and some only a few seconds. 
Some of them were of great severity. She had 
received many falls, burns, and bruises in conse- 
quence of their sudden accession. They occurred 
both day and night. Ordered a purgative and 
bromides. 

December 6th. There has been no improve- 
ment. Discontinued medicine and gave a treat- 

* This case was made use of in " Telepathy and the Sublimi- 
nal Self," but is retained here as an important part of the report. 



2o8 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

ment by hypnotism. The patient went to sleep 
in eight minutes; slept only a short time and 
awoke herself. She was at once put to sleep 
again, slept only a few minutes, and again awoke 
without any interference. 

December 7th. The attacks have not been so 
frequent and not nearly so violent since the treat- 
ment. Hypnotised. The patient went into a 
profound sleep and remained so one hour, when 
I awoke her by the upward passes. 

December 8th, the attacks have been still less ^ 
severe; the patient has slept quietly; appetite 
good. Hypnotised and allowed her to sleep 
two hours, and then awoke her by upward 
passes. 

December 9th. There has been still more 
marked improvement; the attacks are very few, 
none lasting more than half a minute. The next 
day she was again hypnotised and allowed to re- 
main asleep three hours. Awoke her, but she 
was still drowsy when I left. After I had gone 
she went directly to sleep again and slept until 
supper time, four hours later — ate her supper and 



TREATMENT WITHOUT SUGGESTION. 209 

went directly to sleep again, and slept soundly all 
night. 

December loth. There has been no return of 
the attacks. A month later she had not had any 
return of them. She soon after left town, and I 
have had no report from her since. It is reason- 
able to suppose that, if the attacks had returned, I 
should have heard from her. 

Case IV. — Mrs. M., thirty-eight years old. 
English. Married and the mother of two chil- 
dren, the eldest fifteen years of age. 

She had suffered from serious and protracted 
lung trouble, from which she had recovered, but 
was still a very great sufferer from chronic rheu- 
matism associated with a gouty diathesis, so pain- 
ful as to confine her almost entirely to her room, 
and much of the time to her bed. The joints were 
enlarged and painful; there was also severe mus- 
cular and sciatic pain, and her general health was 
wretched. She was a personal friend, and on one 
or two occasions I conversed with her about hyp- 
notism as a possible relief, at least from the acute- 
ness of her suffering. The approval of her phy- 



2IO HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

sician was obtained and I treated her as follows : 
She was placed in a comfortable position, reclin- 
ing on a couch. Passes were made, commencing 
at the top of the head and going slowly down the 
whole length of body and off at the feet — the 
passes at first lightly touching the dress, but later 
being made at a distance of two or three inches. 
After fifteen minutes of this treatment, being 
seated on the lounge by the patient's side and 
facing her as nearly as possible, the thumbs were 
held as in the cases already described,and the pa- 
tient was directed to look at some convenient 
object, easily in the range of her vision. Very 
soon a condition of comfort, quiet, and drowsi- 
ness commenced, and after fifteen or twenty 
minutes so spent I arose and silently left the pa- 
tient, without arousing her. The result was 
always a marked relief from pain for a period of 
from twelve to twenty-four hours, and a good 
night's sleep. After the first treatment the pain 
never returned with the same severity as had pre- 
viously characterised it. The treatment was con- 
tinued twice a week for a period of three months, 



TREATMENT WITHOUT SUGGESTION. 211 

with marked relief from suffering and great im- 
provement in her general health. 

The patient soon after returned to England. 
She was not a sentimental person, but she always 
referred to these semi-weekly treatments as very 
helpful stepping-stones over a most wretched and 
painful portion of her life. 

Case V. — This case is briefly sketched as Case 
VI. on page 118. It shows the effect of hyp- 
notism alone upon the capillary circulation. 

Case VI. — F. S., a young girl fifteen years of 
age, American, and a patient of mine from her 
birth. 

August 31st, 1885, after a summer of some ex- 
citement out of town, while on her journey home 
she had an epileptic attack lasting several minutes, 
the first she had ever experienced. After arriv- 
ing at home in the afternoon two more attacks 
occurred. I saw her in the evening. She was 
in bed, somewhat prostrated, but not specially ill, 
nor much excited; she chatted pleasantly, as usual. 
She had an attack, clearly epileptic in character, 
during my visit. She had premonitions of the 



212 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

attacks, but only a moment before their occur- 
rence, and, if standing, she at once fell and lost 
consciousness. Some of the attacks were short 
and unaccompanied by any marked convulsive 
movements, others were of longer duration, more 
severe in character, and were accompanied by con- 
vulsive action, frothing at the mouth and biting 
the tongue. Prescribed a laxative and the bro- 
mides. During the two following days the at- 
tacks were of the same general character and 
numbered from six to ten each day. 

September 3d I made known to the mother the 
character of the disease, the uncertainty regard- 
ing its course, and the rather unsatisfactory re- 
sults of treatment by the usual methods, and I at 
once proposed treatment by hypnotism, which 
was cordially approved. 

The patient was then sitting in an easy chair; 
I seated myself opposite her, took her hands in 
mine without explaining to her my object, and 
directed her to look quietly at a specified object, 
easily within the range of her vision. She asked 
what it was all about, but without insisting on any 



TREATMENT WITHOUT SUGGESTION. 213 

definite answer did as I directed her, and in one 
minute she was asleep. 

Unfortunately, in this case the sleep was not 
profound; she could be awakened by ordinary 
means, and usually awoke of her own accord in 
about twenty minutes. She could easily be put 
directly to sleep a second time by the same method, 
and would then sleep again about the same length 
of time. Treatment was given her twice a week, 
and the effect was altogether gratifying; all the 
attacks became light after the first two or three 
treatments, and their frequency was soon dimin- 
ished to one or two a week, then one or two a 
month, until in about four months they seemed to 
have entirely disappeared. Three months later 
two attacks occurred, with an interval of a week. 
These attacks were followed by the same treat- 
ment, continued once a week for a period of three 
months. Several years have now elapsed since 
treatment was discontinued, and no attacks have 
occurred during that time. 



CHAPTER VII. 



CONCERNING " RAPPORT/^ 



That there is some special relationship, sym- 
pathy, or facility of communication between the 
hypnotised subject and the hypnotiser will not be 
doubted by any who have had experience in hyp- 
notising or have witnessed the resulting phe- 
nomena. Exactly what the nature of this 
relationship is we do not know; but being a fact, 
unusual and not well understood, it is at least 
worthy of inquiry and consideration. 

Since the introduction of new and more exact 
methods of investigation, the more subtle and re- 
mote agents in nature have become the chief sub- 
jects of interest and study. In astronomy it is 
no longer the hunt for new planets, asteroids, and 
moons in our own solar system that chiefly en- 
gages the attention of the student, but the rela- 
tions, movements, and even the constitution of 

214 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT." 215 

distant suns, made possible by the revelations of 
the improved telescope and spectroscope. In 
physics it is not new elements and processes so 
much as the nature of the most subtle agents with 
which we are acquainted — light, heat, electricity, 
and magnetism — that is of interest. In anatomy 
and physiology it is no longer the study of muscles 
and bones, of glands, ducts, and blood vessels that 
interests the advanced student, but the nature and 
functions of cells, the constitution of the blood 
and its changes, the movements and meaning of 
neurons and their processes, germ cells and their 
plasma, and their relation to heredity and the 
form and character of the newly organising indi- 
vidual. In medicine it is no longer merely the 
recognised forms and clinical history of diseases 
and the drugs which seem to influence them, but 
the causes, germs, and influences that are back of 
disease, and the more direct and subtle means of 
cure. So also in psychology it is not only the 
obvious activities of the intellectual faculties, the 
primary consciousness, but the less understood 
activities pertaining to the subconscious mind and 



ai6 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

the influences which affect and govern them that 
interest the intelligent student. In short, in every 
department of investigation the tendency is to- 
ward the study of the more subtle and refined 
agents and influences in nature — influences which 
formerly were not known to exist nor even imag- 
ined; and it is the encroachment of students upon 
this former terra incognita which has trans- 
formed magic in all its forms into science, and the 
supernatural into the reign of law, even when 
phenomena are still mysterious. In that manner, 
while astrology has been transformed into 
astronomy, and alchemy into chemistry, the ob- 
servation and study of oracular responses, super- 
normal voices and visions, influences exerted at a 
distance, and occult phenomena generally have 
developed a new science of experimental psy- 
chology with its already splendid achievements. 
Its work has been chiefly in unexplored regions, 
abounding in marshes, fogs, and miasms, and 
beset with myths, demigods, and hobgoblins, but 
it is here that a great battle between light and 
darkness is now being waged; it is here that keen 



CONCERNING "RAPPORTS 217 

scrutiny is being exercised to distinguish the real 
from the unreal, the actual from the chimerical, 
and that vigorous work is being done in opening 
up the marshes of the still half -explored regions 
to the sunlight and so dispelling the unwholesome 
miasms and the obscuring fogs, and banishing 
the demigods and monsters. 

Physical science in its more delicate researches, 
and especially in extending the wave theory to 
those subtle conditions of matter, light, heat, and 
electricity, has approached the boundary of the 
realm of psychology, and perhaps in its vibratory 
theory has presented the common point of con- 
tact which hereafter may unite them. In physics 
there was needed a medium which should in some 
manner account for the phenomena which were 
exhibited by light and other subtle agents or 
forms of matter. So in psychology there is 
needed a medium which shall render possible an 
explanation of some of the more subtle phenomena 
which it encounters. We will examine some of 
these unusual psychic phenomena with this object 
in view, namely, to ascertain whether such a 



2i8 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

medium of communication or transference exists, 
and if so, what light it may throw upon the phe- 
nomena themselves. A series of phenomena 
which at once attracts the notice of observers, and 
w^hich should be of particular interest to students 
of hypnotism, is that connected with a special rap- 
port often exhibited between the hypnotised sub- 
ject and the hypnotiser, and is most clearly shown 
in a community of sensations. 

In April, 1883, a committee of well-known men, 
appointed from those best equipped for the pur- 
pose among the members of the English Society 
for Psychical Research, made its report upon the 
subject of mesmerism, and this report, along with 
subsequent ones, is of special interest in this con- 
nection. They deal with thought transference, 
community of sensation, and the production of the 
hypnotic sleep at a distance. In the first experi- 
ments the subject was a healthy youth of good 
intelligence named Wells, about twenty years of 
age and a baker by occupation. The operator 
was Mr. G. A. Smith, well known to the Com- 
Hiittee as an earnest investigator, anxious only to 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT." 219 

discover truth. Wells was an impressible sub- 
ject, responding perfectly to suggestions, both 
those to be immediately fulfilled and those which 
were for subsequent fulfilment in the waking 
state. In the following experiment Wells was 
hypnotised and placed in a chair and blindfolded. 
Mr. Smith, the operator, either stood behind him 
or often in another room separated by thick por- 
tieres from the one occupied by the subject. 
First the upper part of Mr. Smith's right arm was 
continuously pinched by a third person. After 
an interval of one or two minutes Wells began to 
rub the corresponding part of his own arm. The 
back of the neck was pinched — the same result 
was observed. The lobe of the ear was pinched; 
the same part was quickly indicated by Wells — 
and so on with various parts of the body, until 
sixteen tests were made and twelve were correctly 
located on his own body by the subject. In a 
second series of trials, the same results were ob- 
tained. Once, when Mr. Smith's right ear was 
sharply pinched. Wells smartly struck his own 
right ear as if catching a troublesome fly, crying 



2 20 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

out at the same time, ''Settled him that time." 
Powdered ginger was put in the operator's 
mouth; Wells exclaimed, ''I don't like such hot 
things^ — what do you want to give me Cayenne 
for?" Salt, wormwood, and other things were 
put in Mr. Smith's mouth, but the sensation of 
ginger was so persistent that the subject only 
described them as " nasty," or that they made 
his eyes water. When Mr. Smith's right leg was 
again pinched. Wells was sulky, and for a time 
refused to say anything, but as the severe pinch- 
ing continued, he violently drew up his right leg 
and began rubbing the corresponding part. 
After this Wells became still more obstinate and 
refused to give any indications whatever, but with 
some acuteness he explained his reason by saying, 
" I aint going to tell you, for, if I don't tell, you 
won't go on pinching me — you only do it to make 
me tell." When Mr. Smith, his hypnotiser, re- 
monstrated, he replied, " What do you want me 
to tell for? They aint hurting you, and I can 
stand their pinching." * 

* These various experiments by Mr. Smith and the hypnotic 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT." 221 

Mr. C. Kegan Paul * of Oxfordshire, England, 
in 1852 frequently magnetised his friend Mr. 
Walter Short, then an undergraduate of New 
College, and Mr. Short proved to be an excellent 
subject, exhibiting both clairvoyance and com- 
munity of sensation. Experiments in community 
of sensation were often carried on in the family. 
On one occasion after dinner, the dessert still 
being on the table, Mr. Short was mesmerised 
and placed with his face to the wall. Mr. Paul 
then shut his own eyes and a third person placed 
different substances from the table in his mouth, 
each of which was perfectly recognised by Mr. 
Short. Then substances unknown to either 
operator or subject were brought in from another 
room and tried under the same circumstances — 
spice, pepper, salt, raw rice, and finally soap were 
all used and all immediately recognised by Short, 
the soap being perceived and rejected with a great 
splutter of disgust by the subject. Mr. Paul goes 

subject Wells are so apropos and so thoroughly authenticated that 
some of them are introduced here in full, though already briefly 
stated in my former volume. 
*Case from Phantasms of the Livings v«l. fi. p. 666. 



22 2 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

on to say, " the experiment ended only when we 
could think of nothing else to taste." 

Elliotson in the Zoist gives several remarkable 
instances of community of sensation between hyp- 
notiser and subject, and Dr. William A. Ham- 
mond made experiments with one of his subjects 
similar to those made by Mr. Smith with the sub- 
ject Wells. They were conducted in different 
rooms; the operator and subject, each accom- 
panied by an observer, being separated in distance 
by more than a hundred feet, and by two parti- 
tions. 

In the second report of the Committee on Mes- 
merism for the Society for Psychical Research, 
the following experiment was performed: The 
subject was allowed to remain in his normal con- 
dition, without sleep or any hypnotic effect except 
such local effects as were produced without con- 
tact or any possible idea of expectancy being con- 
veyed to him. 

The subject was blindfolded and seated at a 
table on which his ten fingers were spread out be- 
fore hirn, A screen formed of quadrangular 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORTS ' ,223 

layers of thick brov^m paper was placed in front of 
him, extending far beyond his range of vision in 
either direction; it sometimes rested on his fore- 
arms as he sat at the table, and sometimes his arms 
were passed through holes into which the arms 
closely fitted. All the arrangements were such 
that no one witnessing the experiment considered 
it possible that, even though he were not blind- 
folded, he could obtain the slightest view of his 
hands or of anything that was transpiring in front 
of him. 

Two out of the subject's ten fingers spread 
out before him were then silently indicated by 
a member of the investigating Committee, and 
Mr. Smith, the operator, who, equally with the 
Committee, was interested to secure true and re- 
liable results, standing beyond the screen and at 
a little distance from the subject, proceeded to 
make very slow and gentle passes over the indi- 
cated fingers, without contact — so slow and so 
gentle and so far distant as to preclude the possi- 
bility of producing any perceptible current of air 
or change of temperature. Others present were 



224 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

totally unable to detect when similar passes were 
made over their own fingers, and the subject, it 
should be remembered, was in his normal condi- 
tion without any super-sensitiveness such as is 
sometimes observed in the hypnotised subject. 
To make the test still more conclusive on this 
point, members of the Committee made similar 
passes in similar proximity and at the same time 
over other fingers, thus eliminating the possi- 
bility of the two fingers treated by the operator 
being discovered by the subject by ordinary sensa- 
tions. After the passes had been continued for a 
minute or less, it was found that the two fingers 
treated by the operator were perfectly stiff and 
insensible. Sharp instruments thrust ever so 
gently into the other fingers evoked the start and 
outcries which might be expected, but the same 
instruments thrust deep into the two which had 
been selected for trial produced no sign of pain, 
either by sudden start, outcries, or change of 
countenance. Tests that would seem almost in- 
human were applied — thrusting sharp or dull in- 
struments into the flesh, burning with a lighted 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORT." 225 

match, and applying a strong current of elec- 
tricity, all failed to elicit any sign of discomfort, 
but the subject chatted smilingly with bystanders, 
evidently unconscious that any injury was being 
inflicted. A little of the same treatment to the 
other fingers was resented with violent protesta- 
tions. Rigidity of the fingers which had been 
treated was tested by telling the subject to close 
his fist; the selected fingers in every case refused 
to bend with the others. 

In each of the cases now described it is evident 
that there was some means or influence present by 
which intelligence and even physical effects were 
conveyed from the hypnotiser to the subject, apart 
from any influence conveyed by ordinary means 
through the senses, and in the last-mentioned case 
local anaesthesia was produced while the subject 
was in his normal condition and ignorant of the 
nature of the experiment and of the effect which 
w^as expected to be secured. Neither operator 
nor subject was " in the business," nor did they 
take part in these experiments for pay. 

In endeavouring to ascertain the nature of the 



226 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

efficient influence or medium concerned in these 
experiments we are limited to two hypotheses^ — 
it must be either physical or mental. It would 
seem that for physical effects, a physical cause of 
some sort was necessary, while on the mental side 
th6re is at least the possibility of thought trans- 
ference, communication from brain to brain, from 
mind to mind, without the aid of the senses in 
their normal uses. But even here the mode of 
transmission is just as mysterious, even more so 
than with the supposition of a physical means of 
communication, while the physical part of the 
phenomena is still left unaccounted for. 

So far as we have now noted the experiments, 
the communication has been carried on between 
two living intelligent human beings, but similar 
passes to those which produced anaesthesia in the 
designated fingers of the subject were made over 
inanimate objects and by so doing a quality was 
imparted to them which the same sensitive in his 
normal state was able to detect; immediately dis- 
tinguishing the article so treated from other 
articles, however numerous and however placed 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT." 227 

with reference to them. The following example 
illustrates this point : 

The sensitive in his normal condition was taken 
to a room on another floor and there shut in and 
engaged in conversation by a third person. 
Among ten miscellaneous objects, such as a card- 
board box, a pocket book, a piece of sealing wax, 
a paper cutter, etc., one was selected over which 
the operator made passes, sometimes with light 
contact, sometimes without contact. The article 
was then placed carelessly with the other articles. 
At this stage of the proceedings the operator was 
taken into a third closed room, and his atten- 
tion occupied by conversation. The sensitive 
being now introduced, he at once selected the 
article which had been treated by the operator. 
This was repeated many times with unvarying 
success. Sometimes, instead of miscellaneous 
articles, ten small volumes, externally exactly 
alike, were used; and as in the former case the 
operator made passes over the selected book, often 
without contact, while similar passes were made 
by several persons over other books of the ten 



228 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

used, but the same unvarying success attended the 
experiments — the object or book treated by the 
operator was detected and promptly designated 
in every instance. Here certainly thought trans- 
ference must be eliminated. In this connection 
Dr. Esdaile's experiments with magnetised or 
mesmerised water are pertinent. He writes: 

'* From multiplied experiments in six different 
hospitals, I should as soon doubt the power of 
fresh water to quench thirst as that of mesmer- 
ised water to induce sleep in persons who have 
already felt the mesmeric influence. Here also it 
will be said that smell and taste, suggestion and 
imagination, and no extraneous influence pro- 
duced the result. I repeat that the only experi- 
ments on which I rely were first trials; they were 
made at intervals of months and years, in six dif- 
ferent hospitals, and my test experiments were 
thus conducted : the mesmerised water was medi- 
cated with tincture of rhubarb, tincture of car- 
damoms, aromatic spirits of ammonia, etc., and 
given to the patients at their usual time of taking 
physic, so that it was impossible to excite suspi- 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT:' 229 

cion or expectation of anything unusual in them. 
The result was that a very large proportion of 
susceptible subjects were so profoundly entranced 
on the first occasion that they might have been 
operated on without pain, and their unhealthy 
sores were frequently burned with undiluted nitric 
acid without their feeling it. What more ef- 
fectual precautions could be taken by those who 
deny any external influence, I cannot in my sim- 
plicity imagine." 

My own experiments with magnetised water 
with two different sensitives have already been 
given, p. 205. I will add here that, with my pa- 
tient M. M., I could at any time produce muscular 
contraction, showing itself in well-marked spasm, 
simply by pointing my finger at her, from a dis- 
tance of ten or twelve feet, and this occurred 
whether she was aware of my action or not, or 
even of my presence, and the same effect was 
produced through a closed door. On one occa- 
sion I made my visit at an altogether unusual 
hour and asked an attendant, who was also in- 
terested in the experiment, to be in the room with 



230 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

the door just sufficiently ajar, so that my move- 
ments could be observed by her while standing 
near the very slight opening. The patient was 
lying on the bed at least ten feet from the door 
with her back toward it and quite unaware of my 
presence, but the moment I pointed energetically 
toward her through the door, the same convul- 
sive action occurred and was repeatedly observed 
by the attendant. 

The following is Esdaile's report of hypnotis- 
ing a blind man without his knowledge. He 
says • 

" I had been looking for a blind man upon 
whom to test the imagination theory, and one at 
last presented himself. I placed him on a stool 
without saying a word to him, and entranced him 
^n ten minutes without touching him. This man 
became so susceptible that by making him the ob- 
ject of my attention I could entrance him in what- 
ever occupation he was engaged and at any dis- 
tance within the hospital enclosure. My £rst at- 
tempt to influence the blind man was made by 
gazing at him steadily over a wall while he was 



CONCERNING " RAPPORT J* 231 

engaged in the act of eating his dinner, at a dis- 
tance of twenty yards. He gradually ceased to 
eat, and in a quarter of an hour was profoundly 
entranced and cataleptic. This was repeated at 
the most untimely hours, when he could not pos- 
sibly know of my being in his neighbourhood, and 
always with the same results." 

Hypnotising at a distance is a fact so well estab- 
lished that it must be taken into account in any 
fair consideration of the subject of Rapport. 
The Report of the Committee of the French Royal 
Academy of Medicine, published in 183,1, states 
that the Committee ''could not doubt the reality of 
the effect produced on one of the subjects with 
whom they experimented, by an influence exer- 
cised without his knowledge and at a certain dis- 
tance from him." 

Examples of this phenomenon are numerous. 
In the Zoist Mr. Adams, a surgeon of Lyming- 
ton, England, reports this incident coming under 
his own observation: A medical student, a 
guest in his own house, succeeded in affecting 
the manservant of a mutual friend at a distance 



232 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

of nearly twenty miles. Two experiments were 
made, and on each occasion the time was set 
and the arrangement made privately with the 
man's master. On one occasion the subject at 
7.30 p. M., the time agreed upon for the experi- 
ment, fell into a sound sleep or rather trance, 
from which he was with difficulty aroused. He 
said that before he fell asleep he lost the use of 
his legs so that, desiring to kick away the cat, he 
found he could not move them. The other occa- 
sion was equally well marked and happened at 
the appointed time, 9.30 in the morning, and 
while he was walking across a field, engaged in 
his ordinary duties. 

Of more recent examples made under test con- 
ditions with reputable physicians as the operators, 
and most intelligent persons as witnesses and par- 
ticipants in the experiments, those made in 1886 
by Professor Pierre Janet and Dr. Gibert, both 
leading physicians of Havre, and witnessed by 
Mr. F. W. H. Myers and the late Dr. A. T. Myers 
of the Society for Psychical Research, are well 
known to readers of the Proceedings of the 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORT." 233 

Society, and are recounted in my former vol- 
ume. 

Other interesting cases have been reported by 
Dr. Dufay, a practising physician of Blois and 
also a senator of France. The following were 
laid before the Societe de Psychologic Physio- 
logique of Paris — a society formerly presided 
over by Charcot and including among its mem- 
bers many of the foremost physicians of France — 
and they were published with the bulletins of the 
society in the Revue Philosophique in 1888. 
They also appear in the Proceedings of the 
S. P. R. Briefly stated (i) Mile. B. was a 
rather indifferent little actress at a theatre in Blois 
when Dr. Dufay was medical attendant. He had 
treated her several times for hysterical attacks, 
and found her an unusually good hypnotic sub- 
ject. He could hypnotise her by a word or even 
a look, and he had noticed that her intelligence 
was greatly increased while in the hypnotic con- 
dition. He had sometimes hypnotised her just 
as she was about to appear in the scene in which 
she was to play, and on these occasions she always 



234 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

made a great success; and it was this which in- 
duced him to undertake the following experiment. 
One evening he arrived late at the theatre. 
The manager had just received a telegram in- 
forming him that the grande coquette in 
" Caprice," the play which was announced, had 
missed her train and could not be present. Mile. 
B. was the only substitute, and the manager was 
anxiously waiting for Dr. Dufay, hoping for 
some assistance from him. 

*' Does she know her part ? " the doctor asked. 
" She has seen it played several times, but has 
never rehearsed it," replied the manager. 

'* Have you expressed any hope that I might 
come to her assistance? " 

" I took care not to do that." 
" Very well, do not let her know I am here — I 
will take advantage of this opportunity to make 
an interesting experiment." 

The doctor did not show himself behind the 
scenes, but took his place in a closed box at the 
farther end of the house; he then willed intently 
that Mile. B. should fall asleep. He learned at 



CONCERNING '' RAPPORT r 235 

the end of the play that the young actress at the 
same time stopped in the midst of her toilet, sud- 
denly sunk down upon the sofa in her room, beg- 
ging her dresser to let her rest a little. After a 
few minutes she got up, finished her toilet, and 
went upon the stage, where he himself had seen 
her make a splendid success. Not only had the 
doctor succeeded in his experiment of putting her 
to sleep mentally at a distance and under the cir- 
cumstances noted, but in the hypnotic condition 
her memory was so greatly improved that she 
knew her part perfectly without ever having re- 
hearsed it, and her artistic sense and whole per- 
sonality were so elevated as to secure results far 
beyond her ordinary capacity. 

(2) Mme. C, thirty-five years of age, and of a 
very nervous temperament, was easily hypnotised 
and had several times been relieved of most vio- 
lent and otherwise intractable headaches. She 
would in some way feel the doctor's influence a 
block or more away — would declare he was ap- 
proaching and go to the window to verify it. 
Under such circumstances he naturally considered 



■r\ 



236 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

the possibility of influencing her at a distance. 
One day, when Mme. C. was in perfect health and 
therefore neither expecting to see him nor having 
her mind drawn toward him, the idea suddenly 
occurred to him that he would mentally order her 
to sleep, without her either wishing or suspecting 
it. Having made the effort, an hour later he 
went to her house and asked the ser^^ant who 
opened the door if an instrument which he had 
mislaid from his case had been found in Mme. C.'s 
room. "Is not that the doctor's voice that I 
hear?" asked M. C. from the top of the stair- 
case; *' beg him to come up. Just imagine," he 
said, '' I was just going to send for you. Nearly 
an hour ago my wife lost consciousness and 
neither her mother nor I have been able to bring 
her to her senses. Her mother, who wishes to 
take her into the country, is distracted." The 
doctor entered the room, not intending to confess 
his part in the little tragedy, but Mme. C. immedi- 
ately addressed him : " You did well to put me to 
sleep, doctor, because I was going to allow myself 
to be taken away to the country ", and she went 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORT:* 237 

on to tell why she did not wish to go. The doc- 
tor continues : '' I repeated the experiment many 
times with this patient, and always with perfect 
success. I have even completed the experiment 
by also waking her from a distance solely by an 
act of volition, which formerly I should not have 
believed possible. The agreement in time was 
so perfect that no doubt could be entertained." 

Finally, it was arranged between the doctor and 
M. C. that, if one of Mme. C.'s violent headaches 
should occur when she was away from the city, 
the doctor should be notified by telegraph and he 
would put her to sleep from the distance, what- 
ever it might be. This was afterwards perfectly 
accomplished between Sully-sur-Loire and Blois, 
a distance of 112 kilometers — nearly 70 miles. 

Another form of influence exercised by the 
hypnotiser upon the hypnotised subject, without 
contact, is seen in the ability to impress scenes 
simply brought up before the mind of the operator 
with the intention that they should be conveyed to 
the subject. The following well-authenticated 
account is from Gurney, Myers, and Podmore's 



238 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

Phamtasms of the Living, vol. ii. p. 6yy. The 
subject's name was Gannaway and the hyp- 
notiser's CHssold. The subject could be hyp- 
notised and scenes easily be impressed upon him 
by audible suggestion. Later it was discovered 
that mental suggestions were all that were neces- 
sary to impress the scene upon the subject. On 
one occasion, the hypnotiser Mr. Clissold and the 
subject Gannaway were in the dining-room of the 
Hon. Auberon Herbert. Gannaway was hyp- 
notised and stood in a corner, face to the wall. 
Then Herbert at the table wrote out a scheme of 
incidents to be used by the hypnotiser, as fol- 
lows: 

( 1 ) I see a house in flames. 

(2) I see a woman looking out of a window. 

(3) She has a child in her arms. 

(4) She throws it out of the window. 

(5) Is it hurt? etc., etc. 

This was given to Clissold, who silently read it 
and formed a picture of the scene in his own mind. 
Gannaway became much excited and described 
the scenes as he seemed to witness them enacted 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORT." 239 

before him in succession, while they only existed 
in the mind of the hypnotiser. 

Well-authenticated instances are on record 
where community of thought between operator 
and subject has been so complete that matters, 
purposely kept secret from others, were clearly 
perceived by the sensitive hypnotised subject and 
described to the hypnotiser with absolute correct- 
ness and minute detail. 

So we have at least these six different and dis- 
tinct methods in which unusual rapport is ex- 
hibited in connection with the hypnotic condition, 
namely : 

( 1 ) Affecting the sensation of designated parts 
of the body by passes made by the operator, the 
subject being in the normal state. 

(2) So affecting inanimate objects by passes 
without contact that the sensitive subject in nor- 
mal condition can distinguish them from other 
similar objects not so treated. 

(3) Hypnotising at a distance. 

(4) Community of sensation. 

(5) Community of thought. 



240 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

(6) Inability of B. to arouse a subject put to 
sleep by A., and distress caused by such attempt. 
A., however, can arouse him by an upward pass, 
or a whispered command; a fact so well known 
that it is unnecessary to illustrate it by cases. 

That experiments attempted in cases like those 
above indicated will always succeed is not true, 
but it is true that they all sometimes succeed. It 
may even be true that the results, as is demanded 
in physical science, will always follow when 
identical conditions are present, but the difficulty 
is to secure identical conditions, for these condi- 
tions, instead of relating tO' inorganic matter— so 
nearly constant in nature, relate to two living and 
constantly varying organisms, and not only must 
physical conditions be taken into account, but 
mental and psychic conditions, so unstable, so 
various in different individuals, and so difficult 
to command. These conditions, however, have 
been secured in a sufficient number of cases and 
under sufficiently strict observation and surround- 
ings to certify them as facts, and, being so certi- 
fied, they demand consideration. 



CONCERNING " RAPPORT r 241 

For one person to feel the sensations experi- 
enced by another, either tactile or connected with 
the special senses, particularly when the persons 
are widely separated or are in separate closed 
rooms, is unusual, and demands some other mode 
of communication than what we find in ordinary 
use. To affect the hand or a finger of a person 
in his normal condition by passes without con- 
tact, so that sensation is abolished, rendering 
punctures, burnings, and electric shocks unfelt, 
demands some unusual method or medium of 
communication. To put one to sleep by simply 
willing it at a distance of half a mile away, indi- 
cates some unusual influence and some unusual 
way of communicating that influence; and so of 
the other cases above referred to. Nevertheless, 
these phenomena are not without their analogies 
in physical science. There is a quality in the 
loadstone or magnet which acts at a distance and 
through intervening obstacles, producing physical 
effects without itself being cognisable by our 
senses. Why should it be deemed a thing in- 
credible that the vastly complicated and highly 



242 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

endowed human organism should have at least an 
equally extended function ? 

We have only the two categories before men- 
tioned from which to choose our explanation ; the 
method must be either physical or mental. If 
physical, there must be some physical aura, ema- 
nation, atmosphere, of some special or general 
character, at present unperceived by the ordinary 
senses, by which the effects are accomplished. Or, 
if mental, there must at least be thought trans- 
ference, and the thought must be endowed with a 
power quite beyond our ordinary experience and 
be transferred by some method of which we are 
ignorant. Either the facts must be denied or an 
explanation derived from one of these sources 
must be appealed to. A certain number of per- 
sons will undoubtedly take the former alternative 
and deny the alleged facts; it is easier and at 
present perhaps more orthodox and popular, but 
generally the denial comes from those who in- 
dulge only in a priori methods; they are them- 
selves quite without experience, and they reject 
the facts because they have not happened to ob- 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORT." 243 

serve them or because they are not in accordance 
with their ordinary experience. But the evi- 
dence for the facts is now so full and complete 
that neither indolence nor a priori objections can 
destroy it. 

On the other hand a certain number accept the 
facts, some because they have seen them verified 
and some because the evidence regarding their 
genuineness seems to them conclusive, and to 
them, the question comes again, What is the nature 
of the agent by which these unusual results are 
obtained? And here let it be again frankly ad- 
mitted, we do not certainly know. Common 
sense, which, though frequently ignored, is often 
an excellent guide even in matters of science and 
philosophy, would indicate that for physical phe- 
nomena, such for instance as producing insensi- 
bility to pain without physical contact, or impart- 
ing a sensible quality to inanimate objects, a 
physical cause would be necessary. In fact, there 
are certain phenomena for which a mental cause 
does not suffice. It does not suffice for an expla- 
nation of causing muscular spasm by pointing at 



244 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

a patient through a closed door, nor for imparting 
to water a quality which, the water being taken by 
an unsuspecting patient, would put him into a 
sleep in which he would become both unconscious 
and anaesthetic. Apart from these experiments, 
is there any ground for supposing such a medium 
to exist? Contemplate for a moment the consti- 
tution of things. Does not every particle of 
matter, organised or unorganised, have its emana- 
tion, its atmosphere, its aura ? Some of them we 
can examine and analyse, and some are too refined 
or diffuse for detection by ordinary means. 

Contemplate our solar system; consider our 
own planet. It has its centre of unimaginable 
forces of heat, electricity, we know not what. 
Enclosing it is a crude crust of solid matter. 
Covering this crust there was at one time an un- 
broken envelope of water, a more rarefied form of 
matter, which still covers nearly three-fourths 
of its surface; surrounding that is a covering of 
atmosphere many miles deep, a form of matter so 
rare that it at first may have been unnoticed or 
unperceived; then perceived, it was still un- 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT:* 245 

known as to its constitution. It was only- 
known by its effects and its uses, and it is 
only in modern times that some of its con- 
stituents have become known, but even now 
probably not all. We have reason to believe that 
all the planets are formed upon the same general 
plan. They each have a centre of heat and 
energy, enclosed in a solid crust and enveloped in 
an atmosphere. So the whole system revolves 
about the sun, each carrying with it its own 
special emanation or atmosphere, extending out 
many miles into space. But that is not all. The 
sun with its own fiery envelope, and the planets 
each with its own special atmosphere surround- 
ing it and adhering, to it — the whole grand system 
with its separate bodies is swimming in a still 
rarer medium; we call it ether, but we know noth- 
ing whatever of its constitution ; we only know it 
by its effects, its uses, and chiefly by its trans- 
mission of light by vibratory action. Moreover, 
an esoteric philosophy declares that while our 
solar system, together with a vast number of other 
suns and systems, is revolving around a com- 



246 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

mon centre in this ether, which we know, all this 
is only a part of an unimaginably greater and 
grander system revolving around a still more dis- 
tant centre and swimming in a medium as much 
more refined than the ether we know as this 
ether is more refined than our atmosphere. Of 
this we experimentally know absolutely nothing, 
while of the ether we simply know it exists, and 
we know it, not because we have captured it and 
analysed it, but because certain phenomena exist 
which make its presence necessary, and scientific 
people believe in its existence on that ground 
alone. Why not the same belief for psychic as 
for physical phenomena ? 

Again, consider the action of molecules of 
matter in their upward journey from so-called 
inorganic matter to living organisms. Who 
knows the nature of the influence, the attraction, 
which causes certain molecules to unite and form 
air, and certain others to form water, and still 
others to form the emerald, diamond, or ruby? 
We call it chemical affinity, but we know it, not by 
its nature or constituents, but by its action and 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORT:' 247 

uses. Yet no one questions the fact of air, water, 
or the ruby because we do not know all about the 
influence which causes molecule to choose mole- 
cule and to assume these particular forms which 
we know, and no other. 

Who can conceive of these molecules otherwise 
than as being possessed of a quality which in- 
heres, permeates, and exhales, forming an atmos- 
phere in which each molecule dvv^ells, even as the 
earth in its atmosphere and the solar system in 
its ether, and by which it unites with other mole- 
cules whose qualities and atmospheres are con- 
genial; and this affinity, causing them to become 
lost in each other, begets another arrangement 
of their elements more useful and upon a higher 
plane than either occupied before the union. 
Who knows the influence which determines the 
rapid movements of the simple vegetable cell in 
some stages of its most interesting transforma- 
tions as witnessed under the microscope in the 
common confervals of our ponds and water 
troughs, or of the beautiful ciliated protozoa 
which are found in their company? 



248 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

Who knows the subtle influence exerted by the 
pollen upon the maturing germ in the ovary of 
the flower, or the method of its transmission 
through stigma and style to reach its destination ? 
And yet these are processes upon which depend 
the continuance of species in plant life. Or com- 
ing directly to human beings, who can tell why all 
apparent qualities — beauty, cleanliness of body, 
and activity of mind — ^being equal, there is attrac- 
tion, affinity existing between two individuals in 
one case and indifference or repulsion in another. 
In the one instance there is comfort, harmony, en- 
joyment, perhaps marriage; in the other there is 
irritation, discord, misery, even when no word is 
spoken. The touch of one person soothes and 
relieves pain, the touch of another irritates and 
may even cause illness. As in molecules and 
worlds so in the whole world of life and humanity, 
there is an atmosphere surrounding each atom, 
each organism, and each individual; an emana- 
tion denoting qualities, physical, mental, and 
spiritual; and when these atmospheres are har- 
monious there is affinity, when inharmonious 



CONCERNING "RAPPORTS 249 

there is repulsion. Some are not fully sensitive 
to these conditions and so neither greatly suffer 
nor enjoy proximity, others are sensitive and 
keenly perceive, and according to circumstances 
enjoy or suffer; and it is from those who are sen- 
sitive, who are able to perceive, not from those 
who cannot, that we must obtain our knowledge 
of this personal atmosphere or aura. Reichen- 
bach more than fifty years ago proved beyond a 
reasonable doubt that many . sensitive persons 
could see a luminosity emanating from the poles 
of a horse-shoe magnet. It was described as a 
feeble light, discernible to most sensitives only in 
total darkness, and even after being a considerable 
time secluded in the darkened room; but, under 
proper conditions, more than fifty people, 
some in perfect health, others affected with 
various nervous diseases, but all of the sensi- 
tive type, were found who could perceive the 
luminosity, and all described it in similar terms. 
A majority of these could also feel the in- 
fluence of the magnet, especially when the open 
poles were directed toward the sensitive; nor 



250 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

does it in the least invalidate this experiment 
that magnets have not been perceived by a 
hundred insensitive people; and sometimes 
sceptics, in trying by experiment to show that 
the effect of the magnet v^as wholly imaginar}^ 
conspicuously fail in their object if the experiment 
is tried with a real sensitive. One physician, 
desiring to make the experiment and to prove that 
the whole sensation was the effect of the imagi- 
nation, brought his horse-shoe magnet with him, 
and having witnessed some successful experi- 
ments, produced his own magnet, which in the 
hearing of the sensitive he described as the most 
powerful one he had ever experienced. When it 
was applied to the patient, however, she declared 
she could not confirm the doctor's statement; on 
the contrary, she found it much the weakest that 
had been tried — in fact, she could not discern 
any effect whatsoever. The doctor afterwards 
acknowledged that the magnet had been demag- 
netised, on purpose to deceive the sensitive. 
Reichenbach's experiments proved the same thing 
regarding large, perfect crystals; namely, that 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORTS a^t 

sensitive patients could both see the light in a 
dark room and feel the effect. Again the same 
thing was shown regarding different parts of the 
body; the same light or luminosity, like a light 
cloud in the darkness, was seen surrounding or 
emanating from the eyes, face, fingers, region of 
the stomach, and other parts of the body. In my 
own experience, many patients of their own ac- 
cord speak of perceiving the passes made over the 
face or down the whole length of the body, and 
they describe the sensation in the same language 
as the sensitives of Reichenbach — some as a feel- 
ing of warmth, or a warm breeze, others as a 
coolness, and others as decidedly a " pins and 
needles " sensation, such as is experienced from a 
mild electric current. One subject, a man of sen- 
sitive nervous organisation, was acutely sensitive 
to the passes, and when I first commenced making 
them in close proximity to the body, but entirely 
without contact, he bounded from the sofa upon 
which he was lying and exclaimed with great em- 
phasis, " Zounds, man ! you have a battery some- 
where about you." I soon convinced him that 



2^2 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESftON. 

this was not the case and, by increasing the dis- 
tance of the passes from the body to two feet or 
more, while still distinctly felt, they were merely 
like an agreeable warm breeze. 

The experiments of Reichenbach were criticised 
and ridiculed in scientific circles, according to the 
fashion of the time, when they were first pub- 
lished. They are, however, so clear in the way 
they are described and so genuine and convincing 
that they seem to me well worth presenting to the 
reader, and I quote one or two as examples. His 
first experiments were made with diseased per- 
sons, but, as the criticism was made that the sen- 
sations of the sick could not be trusted, he sought 
sensitives among those who were in ordinary 
health. He writes : '' Miss Sophie Paur, who 
was kind enough to be present at some experi- 
ments, is young and in perfect health; tall, slen- 
der, and of sensitive temperament. She was good 
enough to devote herself to the repetition of these 
researches several times, at intervals of a few 
months. When, after allowing sufficient time 
for her eyes to become accustomed to the dark- 



CONCERNING "RAPPORTS 253 

ness, I placed before her a row of magnets, the 
horse-shoe among them being still closed by arma- 
tures, she saw these in their natural form, that is 
odically incandescent, and she expressed pleasure 
at the peculiarly delicate beauty of the appearance. 
As I removed the armatures one after another, she 
saw the odic flames blaze up over the poles, and 
always stronger, larger, and brighter at the north- 
ward than the southward poles. The flames al- 
ways became brighter when I pulled off the arma- 
ture, and then returned to their constant magni- 
tude. They appeared to her one and a quarter, 
two and a half, four, and eight inches long, ac- 
cording to the different strength of the bar and 
horse-shoe magnets. She saw the ninefold horse- 
shoe with flames twenty inches high, and above 
these a delicate vaporous column rising up to the 
ceiling of the room, the northward pole having a 
blue and the southward a reddish-yellow flame. 
She found a pocket horse-shoe glow most in- 
tensely when it lay upon her extended hand, 
its light being strengthened by her own odic 
force. 



254 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

" Dr. Endlicher, Professor of Botany, Director 
of the Botanical Garden of Vienna, forty-three 
years of age, so well known throughout Europe 
as a naturalist that I need say no more of him or 
speak of his fitness for physiological researches, 
favoured me with his presence for some hours in 
my dark room. He saw besides the light which 
parts of the human body, organs of plants, crys- 
tals, and amorphous substances gave out abund- 
antly and distinctly whitish luminosity from 
magnetic bars eight inches long, and elongated 
flames issuing from both poles. He also saw 
onefold, threefold, and fivefold horse-shoes sur- 
rounded by a halo of light as long as they re- 
mained closed, and, when opened, emitting 
vaporous flame two to four inches long from both 
poles, while the ninefold horse-shoe, turned up- 
wards, sent out streams of light which were 
nearly forty inches high and produced a light spot 
upon the ceiling of the room. He saw the same 
in a larger and stronger degree from the poles of 
a strong electro-magnet, viz., forty inches high, 
Stronger from the northward than the southward 




w2 






CONCERNING " RAPPORT:' 255 

pole, and producing a bright circle of greater ex- 
tent upon the ceiling." * 

Mr. Gustav Anschutz, a painter of Vienna, a 
healthy, vigorous man thirty-five years of age, 
saw the same appearances as above described, and 
being a painter was able to represent them as they 
were discerned by him, and it is from his paintings 
that the accompanying illustrations were made, 
the whole plate, of which the accompanying cut is 
a part, representing magnets, crystals, flowers, the 
human hand, and the face of his own wife as seen 
illuminated by the odic light in perfect darkness. 

* The peculiar perceptive power of Master Leo Brett of South 
Braintree, Mass. , is of interest in this connection. He is a re- 
markably bright, healthy, and active lad, ten years of age, and the 
son of a reputable physician — Dr. Frank W. Brett. He is easily 
put into the hypnotic condition by his father, and when in that 
condition he is able to see distinctly the tissues, bones, and all the 
internal organs of the body and describe their condition. He has 
examined organs, bones, etc., by means of the X-rays, but he 
scorns that method, declaring that he sees much clearer himself. 
The correctness of his perceptions has been demonstrated in 
numerous instances, not only by patients themselves, but by posU 
mortem examinations. The point of special interest is, that he 
sees * ' an atmosphere of pale-green light flashing in every direc- 
tion about the patient for a distance of four or five feet." This 
he sees around all persons. 



256 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

The descriptions of the light are fully given by 
more than fifty persons of every degree of intelli- 
gence and position in society, male and female, 
in health and sickness, forming, as it seems to 
me, a chain of evidence which no one but a sceptic 
of the habitual and unmitigated type could 
reject. 

In 1883 the Society for Psychical Research 
took up the subject of Reichenbach's experiments 
and attempted to reproduce them. The darkened 
chamber and the horse-shoe and electro-magnets 
were prepared. Sensitive subjects are much less 
frequently found in England than on the Conti- 
nent and no such proportion of sensitives was 
found as was the case in Germany, but out of 
about forty subjects who were introduced into 
the dark chamber three were found who were able 
to see the luminosity from the poles of the electro- 
magnet and tell with the greatest precision the 
moment of the making and breaking of the cir- 
cuit by the appearance of the flame at the poles, 
and this flame was described in almost the exact 
terms in which it was described by Reichenbach's 



CONCERNING "RAPPORTS 257 

sensitives, even to the larger flame at the north- 
ward or positive pole of the magnet. 

So far the cases of psychic phenomena needing 
some sort of connecting medium or influence, 
transcending the powers of the senses in their 
ordinary use, for their explanation have had refer- 
ence chiefly to hypnotism in some of its phases, 
but such cases form only a small minority of the 
whole number of phenomena needing such aid. 
The class of phenomena which may be classified 
under the general heading of telepathy or thought 
transference alone furnishes a vast array of in- 
stances where information has passed from one 
person to another, and been received and recog- 
nised, through distances varying from a few feet 
to half the circumference of the globe. The evi- 
dence for the fact of telepathy or thought trans- 
ference cannot be presented here; it is given in 
extenso in the Proceedings of the Society for 
Psychical Research, and has been summarised 
and facts and evidence presented in my former 
volume, already referred to. Such facts are still 
reckoned as being beyond the border land of 



258 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

science, rejected by some with the same super- 
ciHous contempt as was indulged in by the scien- 
tific bodies of Europe when FrankHn first made 
known the fact that electricity and the lightning 
of the storm-cloud were identical, and yet the 
same facts are accepted by another large and con- 
stantly increasing class of scientific men of equal 
weight and influence, as well as men and women 
of general intelligence and ability to appreciate 
evidence, who have taken the trouble to honestly 
inform themselves concerning the matters at 
issue. 

I will venture to call attention to two or three 
other classes of facts, ignored for the most part 
because they cannot be experienced or experimen- 
tally witnessed by everybody, and the knowledge 
of which must be mainly acquired from the re- 
ports of that much and unreasonably distrusted 
class of persons known as sensitives. First, 
outside the domain of hypnotism, I will mention 
a class of phenomena best known under the gen- 
eral designation of psychometry, or the perception 
by certain sensitive persons of the condition, phys- 



CONCERNING "RAPPORTS 259 

ical and mental, and also the surroundings, of 
other persons concerning whom the perception is 
to be obtained, and also of related scenes and 
events — results secured not only by personal con- 
tact or actual presence, but by simply holding 
some article which has been worn or been in con- 
tact with the person. For example, a sensitive 
was struck with horror on being presented with a 
shred from a piece of cloth which a suicide had 
twisted into a rope and used for hanging himself. 
The whole scene of the tragedy was distinctly 
visualised, the person described, and the motive 
for the suicide given — a fact which was not then 
known, but which afterwards proved to be true. 
Mr. William Denton, in a book entitled The 
Soul of Things, consisting of a series of psycho- 
metric researches made upon this line, has given 
hundreds of instances observed by himself with 
the co-operation of his wife, young son, and a 
few other persons acting as sensitives or per- 
cipients. The following is a condensed account 
of experiment No. LXXIV, in Denton's book: 
Mrs. Denton was the sensitive; the specimen pre- 



26o HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

sen ted to her was a portion of volcanic tufa, about 
the size of a bean, from the excavations of 
Pompeii. All knowledge of this specimen was 
carefully concealed from the psychometer, both 
as to its locality and character (vol. i. p. i8o). 
Holding the specimen in her hand or placing it 
on her forehead, she said, " I see coloured figures 
on the wall; I feel the influence of something 
back of me; it seems like a building; it is a very 
heavy structure; this specimen comes from some 
old country; the influence is ancient; it reminds 
me of Dickens' song of the Ivy Green, which 

" Creepeth o'er ruins old. 
One side of this building looks out on the water, 
it may be the sea, for I feel the influence of some 
large body of water. In front of me and to my 
left hand the view is all shut out, and I have been 
trying to find out the cause. It seems as if there 
was a great mountain, so high that I have to ele- 
vate my head to see the top of it. The mountain 
looks volcanic, and there are smoke and stones 
and cinders and dust all issuing from it in a dense 
body. They are thrown up with such force th^t 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORT:' 261 

for a great distance they form a perpendicular 
column resembling somewhat a tall chimney, and 
then spread out on all sides. The mountain 
seems a hollow shell to a vast depth ; the crater at 
the top being merely an orifice of small dimen- 
sions, compared with the great cavern in the in- 
terior. The mountain has two peaks; the lower 
one much smaller than the other, but much 
sharper. I hear the mountain bellow — what a 
depth that comes from ! The influence that pro- 
duces the eruption seems different from any I ever 
felt before. How strange it is that I did not see 
this at first, for now everything seems so insignifi- 
cant compared with it. The amount vomited out 
is immense. It is not lava, but spreads out in a 
great black cloud that rolls over and covers the 
country like a flood. I can hardly believe what 
I see is correct. It looks as if it would bury 
everything all around it. What a sight ! There 
it goes pouring, spreading, foaming as it rolls 
down the mountain side in great black waves. It 
. seems to me there is water, too, running down the 
side of the mountain. At first all seemed dry, but 



262 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

now the mountain belches out water that sweeps 
everything before it. It is washing away the 
cinders and ashes that it previously threw out. I 
see the water rush through the cleft between the 
upper and lower peaks and sweep a vast amount 
of material down. What a desolation it spreads 
over the land! It is not a dash and then over, 
but it continues to pour out for a long time. The 
lower part of the mountain seems entirely buried. 
It appears to extend for several miles and makes 
it seem like night, it is so dark. There are occa- 
sional flashes that look like lightning, and others 
that are not so evanescent, seen through that 
dense cloud. They seem to be caused by irregular 
bodies of fiery matter shot up from the crater. I 
can think of nothing but electricity that could pro- 
duce the tremendous force necessary to eject this 
material to such a height that it falls miles aAvay. 
Below, at the foot of the mountain, there is ruin 
to everything. I do not see any place at the bot- 
tom. It is a great barren field, or rather an im- 
mense desert of cinders and dust everywhere. I 
cannot recognise any place. There is nothing 



CONCERNING " RAPPORTJ' 263 

visible that was there before. Even the water for 
a long way looks converted into land, being cov- 
ered deep with a dark scum of this same material. 
I feel the influence of human terror that I cannot 
describe. It is awful. I see no one, but the 
feeling is almost overpowering. I feel like 
screaming. There are many different sensations 
commingled, but there is a horror more over- 
powering than all. This is either Herculaheum 
or Pompeii. There is no fancy about this; it is 
too terribly real. Some seem to regard it as a 
judgment of the gods; there is wild agony, prayer, 
blind dread. Now I see them; some wring their 
hands, others throw up their arms wildly." Then 
follows a description of the rush of the multitude 
from the city, the darkness like night, a fresh burst 
from the mountain, the wild efforts to save them- 
selves or their children or aged parents. The 
psychometer had never read the Pliny description 
of this scene nor any other. In no other descrip- 
tion does the element of water come in as playing 
a part in the destruction, and yet the casts of hu- 
man bodies and objects discovered in the excava- 



264 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

tions indicate that the material in which they 
were encased must have been soft Hke mud or 
mortar. 

Geological specimens were also used for psy- 
chometric purposes, a single one being taken from 
a collection of fifty or one hundred, each done up 
in a separate cover, no one knowing what the 
specimen taken at random was, until after the ex- 
periment was made and the psychometric report 
given. In this way remarkably correct descrip- 
tions and drawings were given of scenery and 
animals of the different geological periods^ — of 
the lake-dwellers of Switzerland, and prehis- 
toric man, corresponding with the period indi- 
cated by the specimen under inspection. 

Another class of cases to which I will briefly 
call attention is the power which some persons 
possess of producing hallucinations in the minds 
of other persons, simply by forming pictures in 
their own minds, which they mentally impress 
upon others — not upon one only, but upon several 
at once; making what is known as a collective hal- 
lucination. The best examples of this phe- 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT:' 265 

nomenon are found in India and Thibet. Of 
course there are travellers' tales and incidents 
given in fiction tending to confuse the casual 
reader, but aside from all these exaggerations and 
unauthenticated stories, there is a very important 
residuum of well-sifted facts. Take, for in- 
stance, Jacollicot's Occult Science in India. 
We have here the narrative of an educated 
Frenchman occupying a high judicial position, 
for fifteen years a resident of India and a close 
student of its people, its customs and peculiarities. 
The last chapters of his book are devoted to the 
performances of a small class known as yogis or 
fakirs. In order to judge concerning the per- 
formances of these people, it is needful to bear in 
mind the following statements: They never give 
public performances before large numbers of 
people; generally, they have no assistants and no 
possible confederates ; they present themselves for 
their performances perfectly naked, or clothed 
only with a piece of linen cloth the size of one's 
hand, and no paraphernalia but a very small 
bamboo wand and a small whistle. They know 



266 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

none of the tricks of European conjurors. They 
perform anywhere the audience desires, on a floor, 
a pavement, or the bare ground. They will re- 
peat any performance any reasonable number of 
times, for closer inspection and study. They ask 
no pay, but accept whatever trifle is offered. 

To say that performances done tmder such con- 
ditions are of the same character as those of 
western conjurers and prestidigitators, is simply 
to talk nonsense, though doubtless there are third- 
rate performers who eke out their performances 
by sleight of hand. What are the qualifications 
necessary for the true Indian yogi? They be- 
long to a separate class or caste, and during a 
period of many years they undergo a course of 
training which has for its object the modifying of 
their organisation so as greatly to increase the 
production of the subtle emanation from the body 
Vv'hich they call agasa, the force of the ego, and 
which corresponds to our variously named, and 
generally considered hypothetical, nerve force, 
odic force, vital force, or spiritual force. What 
do they actually accomplish? JacoUicot's yogi 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORTS 267 

came to his room every day for fifteen days. 
Generally there were two long seances each day, 
one in the bright daylight, the other in the night 
with bright illumination, and while applying the 
severest tests in order to discover fraud, he could 
never detect the slightest deception. One instance 
is given of the yogi's power to move inanimate 
objects. An immense bronze vase, full of water, 
stood in the room. The fakir stood several feet 
away and extended his hands toward the vase. 
Within five minutes it commenced to rock to and 
fro upon its base and gently approach the fakir 
with a regular motion. As the distance dimin- 
ished metallic sounds escaped from it, as if some 
one had struck it with a steel rod. Sometimes 
the blows were so quick and numerous that the 
sound seemed like that made by hailstones falling 
upon a metal roof; sometimes measured and slow, 
and sometimes continuous like the roll of a drum. 
Jacollicot asked if he could give directions re- 
garding the movements of the vase, and the fakir 
having given consent, it moved backward and 
forward according to his command, and the blows 



268 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

changed in their intervals, in response to his re- 
quest, from slow strokes to a continuous roar. 
Another day, taking a small teak-wood stand 
which could be lifted with a single finger, he 
placed it on the terrace in the open air and asked 
the fakir if he could fix it there so that it could 
not be moved. The fakir at once walked to the 
stand and, imposing both hands upon the top of it, 
stood motionless for nearly a quarter of an hour. 
Then, with the fakir's permission, Jacollicot ap- 
proached the table and took hold of it, attempting 
to lift it, but it was immovable, as if screwed to a 
floor. Violent effort was then made with the re- 
sult that the top came off in his hand, but the legs 
and cross braces remained standing and still re- 
fused to be moved. Requesting the fakir to go 
away to the other end of the terrace, after a few 
minutes he was able to handle the stand without 
difficulty. 

On another occasion he was walking with the 
fakir and they passed a large garden in which was 
a well, from which a servant was deliberately 
drawing water and pouring it into a bamboo pipe 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORT." 269 

to be conducted to a bathing room. The fakir 
simply extended his hands toward the well and 
at once the servant, though pulling with all his 
might at the cord, could not make it move over the 
pulley. The servant, imagining some evil spirit 
had stopped his work, at once commenced an in- 
cantation in a loud, harsh voice, but immediately 
his voice died away in his throat, and notwith- 
standing violent efforts and contortions, not a 
sound could he utter. After looking at the curi- 
ous spectacle for a few moments the fakir low- 
ered his hands, when at once the servant recov- 
ered his speech, and the rope moved easily over 
the pulley again. A great number of other feats 
were accomplished, among which was the sprout- 
ing of a pawpaw seed which Jacollicot had him- 
self procured. In two hours, the fakir being en- 
tranced and cataleptic during the time, a shoot 
eight inches high had grown. Other perform- 
ances were what we would call of the spiritualistic 
order : materialisations, hands which transplanted 
flowers and other objects from one part of the 
lighted room to another, and the appearance of 



270 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

full forms although the rooms were so arranged 
that it was impossible for any one to gain access 
without discovery. Jacollicot does not pretend 
to say how all these things were done, only that 
they were done, and that, fully alive to the possi- 
bility of being psychologised, he certainly was 
sufficiently himself to take copious notes during 
all the performances, lasting, as before remarked, 
hours at a time and over a period of fifteen 
days. 

As regards the production of absolute halluci- 
nation, the report of the officers of an English 
war ship, in company with several English civil 
officials, is full and complete. Many wonderful 
performances were enacted under conditions of 
their own choosing, and finally the ghastly one of 
a child being placed under a basket in full view, 
which was then run through and through with a 
sword; the blood flowed out under the basket, the 
child screamed, and when the whole horror of the 
tragedy had culminated, the basket was removed, 
but there was no child, ho blood, no signs of the 
tragedy whatever. When pressed for an expla- 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT." 271 

nation, the fakir replied, " Gentlemen, in all this 
exhibition you have seen absolutely nothing." 

Concerning the reliability and evidential value 
of these Indian performances we have not only to 
consider the capability of the observer and his 
possible bias — the personal element — all of which 
in the preceding cases were most favourable for 
true results, but also the probabilities of their 
truth and genuineness — the analogies between the 
performances of the Indian fakir and acts of a 
kindred character performed among ourselves. 
For example, the movements of the great bronze 
vase were only an extension of the same force or 
influence by which tables and other heavy objects 
are moved in the presence of certain persons, as 
vouched for by many intelligent and unprejudiced 
witnesses here in the West. The same is true of 
the fixation of the table. Concerning the sprout- 
ing of the paw-paw seed we only know of the 
immensely stimulating effect of electricity upon 
vegetable growth, and we know the power which 
some persons possess of imparting vitality to 
others and even of causing certain qualities to 



27a HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

inhere in inanimate objects — as, for example, in 
magnetised water; and it is at least conceivable 
that this Indian fakir had by some similar process 
the means of accomplishing in two hours what 
in the ordinary course of nature would require 
four or five days. 

Moreover, among our own American Indians 
many of the same supernormal phenomena have 
been observed. Major North of the U. S. A. 
reported to Mr. Grinnell, the authority on Indian 
customs and folk-lore, that he saw with his own 
eyes the Pawnee Indian doctors make the corn 
grow — not even manipulating it, but standing 
apart and singing. 

The fakir's inhibition of the servant's action 
while drawing water at the well was only an ex- 
tension of the same influence which silently in- 
hibited a lady from carrying a glass of wine to 
her lips while at her dinner; the same influence 
enabled Rufus Sanborn to hypnotise Ira Healy 
half a mile away, as he was innocently coming 
along the road toward home, ^nd by a silent com- 
mand cause him to put his hand out straight and 



CONCERNING " RAPPORT r 273 

rigid before him and keep it so while he com- 
pleted his homeward journey. The tragedy of 
the child pierced through and through beneath 
the basket is only an extension of the tragedy of 
the burning house which Gannaway so vividly 
saw and described, simply from the picture si- 
lently formed in the mind of his hypnotiser. 

Such, in any case, are some of the facts bearing 
upon the subject of rapport, and such are a few, 
and only a few, of the phenomena which demand 
some practicable medium, physical or mental, for 
their production and explanation; and in seeking 
this medium it is difficult to understand how any 
means of communication, even between mind and 
mind, can be effective when divested of all physical 
characteristics. The only theory which has been 
set forth at all approaching this character is some 
form of the vibratory or wave theory, but even 
here the medium through which the vibratory 
principle acts is not designated; and whether it is 
propagated through the atmosphere like sound, or 
through the ether like light, or whether a yet un- 
discovered medium is necessary, is not stated. 



2 74 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

The most delicate vibratory action with which 
we are acquainted is that connected with the trans- 
mission of Hght, but are we to understand that 
vibrations of a certain number of milhons per 
second is all there is of light ? We are told that 
when the prepared photographic plate is properly 
exposed to a distant star, the rays of light acting 
on that plate erode and disintegrate its surface, 
and so leave a visible image of the star upon the 
plate. Do these vibrations alone produce this 
chemical change, or is some quality transmitted 
with the vibrations or generated by them? 
Again, vibrations through all the mediums with 
w^hich we are acquainted are liable to be turned 
aside or obstructed, but we know of no substance 
which constitutes a barrier to thought transfer- 
ence, and we can hardly conceive of such an ob- 
struction. It would seem then that, if the vibra- 
tory theory is to stand as an explanation of the 
method of thought transference, a medium differ- 
ent from any we are at present acquainted with 
must be hypothecated. I am not arguing against 
the possibility of thought transference by vibra- 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT:' 275. 

tion; only, if we entertain a theory, it is well to 
take into account its difficulties. 

Still again, we cannot conceive of vibratory 
action itself as other than purely a physical action, 
and^ when we speak of " psychic force," either we 
are using words without meaning or we mean the 
power of thought to produce physical effects, as, 
for instance, to produce vibrations. But going 
back one step farther, what is this thought which 
produces physical effect? We should be unwise 
to dogmatise where so many wise men acknowl- 
edge ignorance, and the wisest disagree, but 
would it not help a little to admit a material ele- 
ment into our conception of thought? Is it pos- 
sible to realise in our consciousness thought dis- 
connected with organism any more than it is pos- 
sible to realise gravitation without some form of 
matter in which it inheres, and, by the same rea- 
soning, is not affinity, or love, apart from all ma- 
terial substances a mere abstraction? Gravita- 
tion, affinity, love, and thought all demand that 
there shall be matter, or they have no exist- 
ence. 



276 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

Indeed the transcendental theory of pure spirit 
or pure thought is difficuh of conception and is 
declining, just as the gross materialistic idea that 
nothing but matter exists is losing ground; each 
is coming to occupy its appropriate and important 
place. Matter is no longer despised, but is dig- 
nified because of its spiritual quality, and spirit is 
no longer a useless abstraction, but is the essential 
attribute of every atom and molecule in the uni- 
verse, whether it forms a part of the crust of a 
planet, the petal of a flower, the interstellar ether, 
or the thought of man. Matter and spirit are in- 
separably joined and neither is complete without 
the other. The subterfuge of changing names 
simply, and saying substance instead of matter, is 
sufficiently transparent. The man with the club 
is in evidence, even though the ostrich's head is in 
the sand. 

Still we have to deal with both matter and 
spirit, however closely they are united in our con- 
ception of them ; and unqualified monism, whether 
material or immaterial, is a garment too short 
wherewithal to cover a man. If matter is all 



CONCERNING " RAPPORT r 277 

illusion, it is an illusion which " will not down." 
Nor does the inconclusive reasoning of the meta- 
physician nor the assumption of superior acumen, 
and the high disdain on the part of transcendental 
philosophers of every name and grade, for those 
who believe a spade is a spade, serve in the least 
to banish it. There is matter, and it is real, but 
wherever throughout the universe it exists, it pal- 
pitates with that same mysterious force. Its 
name is not important; we may safely call it 
spirit; and wheresoever in the universe spirit 
exists it has its vesture of matter, however re- 
fined that vesture may be. 

We have learned to take cognisance of some of 
these subtle forms of matter, and to note the phe- 
nomena which they exhibit; we must realise that 
we do not know them all. We know light and 
heat, and attraction, and chemical affinity. We 
know life and sensation; we know instinct, intel- 
ligence, reason, and genius; they are all phe- 
nomena resulting from the interaction of matter 
at various stages of development and that mys- 
terious force which is its significant attribute; and 



syS HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

the higher the organisation, the more wonderful 
the phenomena which result. 

The physicist deals mainly with forms of mat- 
ter which are palpable, which he can recognise by 
his senses, and which follow laws that are meas- 
urably well defined. The psychologist deals with 
phenomena which are more subtle, where the 
utmost refinements of matter that are recognised 
fail to aid in any intelligible way in explaining 
what he observes. For instance, when Clissold, 
the hypnotiser, silently formulates in his own 
mind a fictitious scene representing a burning 
house and a woman with a child in her arms ap- 
pearing at an upper window, and Gannaway, hyp- 
notised and standing ten feet away with his face 
to the wall, perceives the scene which Clissold has 
silently formulated, with all the emotion that such 
a scene would naturally excite, there is a psy- 
chical phenomenon, a transference of ideas with- 
out any known means or medium for the trans- 
ference. The physicist may not be interested, it 
is out of the field of his observation. He may 
even doubt the reality of the phenomenon, and 



CONCERNING '' RAPPORT r ^79 

there for him the matter ends. With the psy- 
chologist the case is different; it is quite within 
the field of his observation; he has seen these hal- 
lucinations produced many times by whispered 
suggestions, even by suggestive movements. He 
now witnesses the same phenomena without con- 
tact, speech, or even near proximity. He has no 
doubt of the genuineness of the phenomena and 
he looks about for a means by which they may be 
explained or at least made probable. He con- 
siders what is necessary, just as the physicist con- 
sidered what was necessary to account for the 
phenomena of light. He considers the vibratory 
theory, its analogies and its difficulties. He 
considers it as an hypothesis with many proba- 
bilities in its favour, but so far incapable of 
demonstration. He turns again to look for a new 
physical medium, either to help out the vibratory 
theory or for independent consideration. He 
studies again the experiments of Reichenbach, 
corroborated in important points by the experi- 
- ments of the Society for Psychical Research. 
He is led to reconsider the tabooed subject of 



2So HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

emanation and atmospheres from human organ- 
isms. He finds the evidence of a visual nature 
dependent upon a special class of persons known 
as sensitives. He finds these sensitives are from 
every class and condition as regards health, occu- 
pation, intelligence, and position in society, and 
they all agree substantially in their description of 
the emanation from magnets and various other 
substances, especially from the fingers, eyes, 
forehead, mouth, and in less degree from the 
whole human body. He sees no earthly reason 
why the abundant evidence of these persons 
should not be accepted. The theory of emana- 
tion being allowed, whether fully accepted or not, 
evidence of its truth- comes in from every quarter. 
Personally he verifies the fact that many patients 
feel his own passes — some mildly, some even 
strongly, according to their degree of sensitive- 
ness; evidence accumulates that a quality is im- 
parted to inanimate objects by passes without 
contact, by which sensitives can distinguish that 
object from all other objects not so treated; espe- 
cially is this true of water. He finds by careful 



CONCERNING '' RAPPORT r 281 

observation that the influence of persons and of 
locality inheres in objects which have been in con- 
tact with those persons or have long lain in a 
given locality, and that sensitive persons can de- 
tect and definitely perceive and describe these in- 
fluences; he sees some persons possessing quali- 
ties which enable them to produce physical 
effects which cannot be produced by others^ — 
effects ranging from unusual powers of hypnotis- 
ing and healing to controlling the actions of other 
persons without even contact, producing halluci- 
nations, fixing objects so that they cannot be 
moved, and making them move without contact, 
or with contact such as could by no possibility 
produce the effects. These things are done. No 
simple theory of vibrations is sufficient to accom- 
plish or account for them, but those who possess 
the special physical condition naturally, as is occa- 
sionally witnessed among us of the West, or those 
who have acquired it in an unusual degree by a 
long course of studied preparation and practice, 
as in the East, can most undoubtedly accomplish 
these unusual things. 



282 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

None of these phenomena are in opposition to 
any well-established law of nature, they are simply 
beyond what we are accustomed to consider the 
limit of human power, but not one whit further 
beyond such limits than were the telegraph, the 
telephone, the spectroscope, and the X-ray, be- 
yond what was supposed to be the limit of the 
powers of Nature or her laws, as defined by 
physical science before these discoveries were 
made. 

And now, to what useful purpose does this sur- 
vey tend? That no dem.onstrated means exists 
by which thought transference is effected, either 
in the normal or hypnotic condition, has been al- 
ready admitted; and yet, not only transference of 
thought and of definite ideas, but also of sensa- 
tions, is a demonstrated fact. There is a facility 
of communication independent of the organs of 
sense in their ordinary use, a rapport, between 
some specially sensitive persons, and especially 
between some hypnotised persons and the hyp- 
notiser, which is just as much an established fact 
as that light is communicated by vibration of the 



CONCERNING '' RAPPORT r 283 

ether. The great majority of people have had no 
proof of this latter fact; they do not even know 
that it is a fact; most of us are dependent upon 
those who have special facilities for experimental 
proof for our knowledge of the matter. It is 
exactly the same with regard to telepathy, and the 
denial of the facts by ordinarily intellig^^nt per- 
sons is just as much an indication of " banal igno- 
rance " of this particular subject — and I may say 
of a coarse and unappreciative philistinism — as 
the denial of the various phenomena of light 
would be by the same class of persons. 

The facts being admitted, it is certainly the duty 
of those who are in this line of investigation, and 
who have the facilities, to use all diligence in 
ascertaining the relation of these facts to other 
established facts; to study the phenomena con- 
nected with them and endeavour to discover the 
laws which govern them. It must be understood, 
however, that these investigations can be carried 
on, at the present time at least, only through that 
class of persons known as sensitives. The fact 
that A. can put his head between the branches 



284 HYPNOTISM AND SVCGESflON. 

of a huge electro-magnet and feel nothing is 
no proof that B. cannot feel the influence of 
even a small open horse-shoe magnet directed 
toward him; one is a sensitive, the other is not. 
The fact that A. feels no effect when my finger 
is energetically pointed toward him and he 
cannot detect the difference between water 
which has been magnetised or treated by passes, 
and that which has not been so treated, is no 
proof that my patient M. M. did not perceive 
a like gesture directed at her even when her back 
was toward me and when she was unaware of my 
presence, or that she could not instantly and in- 
fallibly detect the difference between water which 
had been treated by passes, and that which had 
not. She was an unusual sensitive; A. was not. 
She was one of those from whom we learn some- 
thing about the finer influences and susceptibili- 
ties, while a thousand people like A. would yield 
no results. 

But it is because no results are yielded by the 
class to which A. belongs, and because we are 
limited in our experimental knowledge of the 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT." 285 

subject to the small class of sensitives, that 
physicists and physiologists remain sceptical. 

In studying this subject, then, we must learn, 
first, not to expect results excepting from a small 
number of those who may be examined, and with 
due precautions we should respect the testimony 
which those persons give. 

Second: There should be some definite ideas 
regarding the various phenomena which we wish 
to study, and also some definite idea as to possible 
modes of explanation and possible agents in their 
production. The nature of the phenomena to be 
studied has been already sketched in the present 
and preceding chapters; of possible agents or 
methods of production I would suggest three, 
each of which may bear a part, and each of which 
should be thoroughly considered. 

(i) The wave or vibratory theory, which is 
likely at first to find most favour with those whose 
studies have been mostly in the line of physical 
science, and which is so strongly brought forward 
by Camille Flammarion in his recent book. The 
Unknown^ 



286 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

(2) The theory of personal emanation, which 
was never for a moment doubted by the mes- 
merists of the first half of the century, against 
which there has been an unreasonable reaction on 
the part of the medical profession on account of 
its inherited dislike of early mesmerism, but of 
which there is abundant experimental proof. 

(3) The theory of the action of the subcon- 
scious mind, a theory known to the general public 
only within the past few years, and which has 
been considered in a former chapter as well as in 
a former volume. 

Each of these theories contributes its quota to 
the subject of rapport in general, and each, but 
especially the second and third, is closely con- 
nected with hypnotism, and all are experimentally 
best studied with patients who easily go into the 
condition of induced somnambulism. A word 
with reference to the phenomena which seem 
likely to be best accounted for by each of the three 
theories : Concerning the vibratory theory, it may 
be said that it is entirely hypothetical, in that re- 
spect difYering from the other two, both of which 



CONCERNING ''RAPPORTS 287 

have well-observed facts and experimental evi- 
dence to present. Nevertheless, it has its analo- 
gies in physical science and would find its most 
natural place of usefulness in thought trans- 
ference. 

The second theory, that of a personal emana- 
tion, has three great sources of proof, independent 
of that which has occasionally fallen under the 
observation of a few physicians in recent years; 
first, the very full evidence of the early mesmerists 
in which Esdaile bears so conspicuous a part, and 
second, the evidence of Reichenbach, corroborated 
in part at least by the experiments of the Society 
for Psychical Research, and then the evidence of 
clairvoyants of almost every age. It would find 
its most effective work in explaining the trans- 
ference of qualities to inanimate objects, by means 
of which they are recognised by sensitives, and in 
giving clues to psychometers by which, condi- 
tions, and even future probabilities, are made 
known. 

The third theory, the action of the subconscious 
mind, has abundant facts and experimental evi- 



28S HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

dence to its credit. The conscious mind, the in- 
tellect, is personal, egotistical, comparatively nar- 
row in its sphere of activities. The subconscious 
mind is cosmic; it is related to the universal 
forces of nature, the forces which antedate organ- 
isms and which determine the direction of 
organisation. It has direct kinship with the 
automatism of the earliest living forms, with in- 
stinct, that most wonderful faculty of animal life; 
it did marvellous things before the brain, the 
organ of intellect, came into existence; its highest 
expression as a constituent of the human mind is 
seen in child prodigies, in genius, in clairvoyance, 
in prophecy. The brain and intellect were needed 
for the more perfect differentiation of personality, 
to make distinct the ego; but modern civilisation 
has brought it into abnormal prominence and 
activity, has caused it to overshadow and in many 
cases apparently to obliterate the subconscious 
mind. The man of affairs no longer attends to 
impressions; he has no time for passivity, in which 
the ego and consciously directed thought and rea- 
soning are temporarily in abeyance, thus giving 



CONCERNING '' RAPPORT r 289 

the subconscious mind an opportunity to act and 
impress itself. Dreams of every kind are de- 
spised. The clairvoyance of the somnambulist is 
scorned and the words of the seer are looked upon 
as meaningless babble. In a word, the action of 
the subconscious mind is altogether discredited, 
and consequently its monitions become feeble and 
unreliable. Occasionally, however, it flashes up 
and exhibits its superior function, as in the follow- 
ing instance. An artist, a well-known musician, 
is spending a pleasant evening with friends. 
Suddenly the thought comes to him like an irre- 
sistible impulse and command, '' Go to your 
room — -go to your room." He tries to shake off 
the feeling, but it becomes more and more impera- 
tive and persistent. He makes known the im- 
pulse to some friends. They dissuade him, argu- 
ing that it is only a whim, that it will disturb the 
harmony of the party, and that he should disre- 
gard it. But the impulse is too strong and he 
goes. Arrived at his room he seizes his bed and 
removes it to the opposite side of the room. He 
is then perfectly contented and quiet. He re- 



2 90 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

turns to his friends, finishes the evening, goes 
home and retires for the night. Scarcely is he 
asleep when he is aroused by a loud crash, and on 
examination he finds a large beam from overhead 
has fallen directly across the place formerly occu- 
pied by his bed, and in such manner as would 
inevitably have maimed, if not have killed him. 
Something in the artist foresaw trouble. The 
brain with its conscious intellect has no power to 
foresee or give such a warning, but that cosmic, 
far-seeing subconscious mind foresaw and warned 
the short-sighted conscious mind of the danger. 
The artist, in some subsequent '^ experience meet- 
ing," might have told the story with great effect 
as a special interposition of divine Providence to 
save him from an impending calamity; and the 
interposition ztfas divine, the divine within him- 
self; it was his subconscious mind that gave the 
warning. 

Plow little does man even now know of him- 
self, of his powers, of his divine inheritance. 
Concerning all the methods by which this cosmic 
mind acts, both near by and at the greatest dis- 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT." 291 

tances, by making use of vibratory action, or 
clothing itself with those refined physical emana- 
tions which sensitives so uniformly see and de- 
scribe, and so going forth on its errands, we still 
know comparatively little; but whatever its 
methods it is a fact, an intelligent power, and to 
deny it on a priori grounds is to stand in the way 
of all true advancement, even in physical science, 
in whose name this barrier is erected. Laplace 
was a man of insight. A hundred years ago he 
said, *' We are still so far from understanding all 
the agents in nature and their different modes of 
action that it would display very little of the 
spirit of philosophy to deny the existence of phe- 
nomena only because they are inexplicable in the 
actual conditions of our knowledge." 

And yet the philosophers of the generation now 
passing and just passed have done this very thing, 
and while the fallacy has again and again been 
pointed out, it is only now beginning to be seen 
and appreciated in its real force. A few men 
of high scientific attainments, both in this coun- 
try and in Europe, early learned to accept well- 



292 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

authenticated facts and phenomena and await 
with patience increase of knowledge for the 
full elucidation of them, and their wisdom is 
daily becoming approved. They also caught 
the light which the now well-recognised fact 
of the existence and function of the subconscious 
mind throws on all these phenomena relat- 
ing to psychic influence exerted at a distance 
and in unusual ways. The younger generation 
of scientific men cannot afford to remain igno- 
rant of these things, however they may interpret 
them, and knowledge cannot, in time, fail to be 
followed by appreciation; and so the whole plane 
of scientific research into those more refined 
agents and influences which now lie on the bor- 
der land between the physical and the psychic will 
be elevated. The physicists will work diligently 
at their end of the tunnel of the " Hill Difficulty " 
and the psychologists on the other side of the 
hill at their end of the tunnel, and by and by they 
will meet with a great shout of triumph, and an- 
other section of the highway which leads on to 
truth will have been completed. The divine in 



CONCERNING "RAPPORT:' 293 

nature and in man will be recognised and estab- 
lished as the benign and intelligent force in 
matter and in organisms, whose power, as devel- 
oped in man, we are only beginning to appre- 
ciate. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

THE ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 

Of the various objections which in some quar- 
ters have been raised against hypnotism, the most 
influential and really most important have refer- 
ence to its ethical or moral aspect. Some of these 
objections have already been noticed, but in view 
of the importance which the subject is at present 
assuming and the prominent place which hyp- 
notism must occupy in therapeutics, it seems 
proper that a more definite statement of them 
should be made and discussed; that plain facts 
should be presented and sound reason and com- 
mon sense invoked. 

The source of the prejudice which has taken 
hold of the public mind is not far to seek. For 
the last half century, up to a very recent period, 
the ideas of hypnotism entertained by the general 

public have been derived almost entirely from 

294 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 295 

itinerant stage performers and ignorant amateurs. 
The self-styled '' professor " plied his vocation 
for money, and eked out the wonders which he 
advertised by means of well-arranged tricks; the 
amateur displayed his gifts as a parlour or tavern 
amusement for the sake of local notoriety, or in- 
deed sometimes in a rude way for honest thera- 
peutic purposes. In neither case was any effort 
at scientific explanation attempted nor was any 
such explanation known; mystery was an impor- 
tant item of the stock in trade, and the proprietors 
did not purpose carelessly to part with it. 

Such people often did marvellous things; they 
controlled the sensations and actions of their sub- 
jects in a wonderful manner. The affable stage 
'' professor " had his well-trained assistants in 
the audience prepared to make his success assured, 
and the amateur hypnotiser also had his good sub- 
ject at hand for the more sure display of his 
powers; so success was certain, and the public 
very naturally drew the inference that nearly 
everybody could be hypnotised, and that when in 
that condition they were absolutely under the con- 



296 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

trol of the hypnotiser — ^neither of which supposi- 
tions is true. 

Another source of unfavourable impressions 
early brought to bear upon the public was sensa- 
tional literature. All the way from the better- 
class novel and popular magazine article to the 
catchy headline of the daily newspaper, the 
strange, the marvellous, the uncanny were seized 
upon, made vivid by adapting them to characters 
and personages real or imaginary, and served up 
to the public without regard to the false and per- 
nicious inferences which would justly be drawn 
from them. Bulwer's Strange Story was the 
first and perhaps the least harmful of the novels 
treating of hypnotism, while such a popular and 
delightful writer as Du Maurier drew a very 
doubtful possibility in Trilby and associated hyp- 
notism with the loathsome Svengali instead of 
with a scientific and reputable man. Hall Caine 
makes his hypothetical dipsomaniac of the Third 
and Fourth Generation to be partly cured by a 
Paris Dime Museum hypnotiser, while seeming 
perfectly oblivious that men of such standing as 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 297 

Voisin and de la Tourette in Paris, or Tuckey 
or Bramwell in London were doing the same 
work in a clean and wholesome as well as scien- 
tific way. 

The magazine work of the late Mr. Ernest 
Hart relating to hypnotism, both in England and 
in this country, was full of the most unjust and 
misleading statements. Intending to be sarcas- 
tic and witty, he barely escaped being scurrilous; 
assuming an attitude of high scientific treatment 
of his subject, he displayed a deplorable igno- 
rance and unscientific prejudice. With cracked 
bell and smoky flambeaux he paraded his men of 
straw, and added another item to the ignorant 
prejudice of the general public to which he 
catered, while at the same time he flattered the 
self-satisfied superciliousness of a few scientific 
people who simply condemned that of which they 
had no real knowledge; and mirabile dicUi, col- 
lected in book form, this travesty upon science 
bore the imprint of a respectable publisher of 
scientific books. As for the newspapers, they of 
course published the news and delighted in a sen- 



298 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION 

sation; so when the irate father whose daughter 
has married contrary to his wishes chooses to de- 
clare that his daughter has been hypnotised by 
the disturber of his domestic happiness, the papers 
so report; the sympathising pubHc reads and be- 
Heves, notwithstanding the utter ridiculousness 
of such unsifted rubbish. Such has been the 
literary pap upon which the general public has 
been regaled, while coming to its growth and 
forming its opinions upon this comparatively 
new, but now confessedly important, subject. 

Contrast all this with the real work which 
meanwhile was being accomplished, and with the 
men who have been quietly accomplishing it. 
Passing by the splendid pioneer work of Gregory, 
Ashbumer, Esdaile, and Braid in the forties and 
early fifties, and coming down to the last fifteen or 
twenty years, in France we had Charcot, Voisin, 
Liebeault, and Bernheim; in Germany, Moll and 
Heidenhain; in Sweden, Bjornstrom and Wetter- 
strand; in Russia, Ocorowicz, and in England, 
Tuckey and Bramwell. The United States has 
produced few early writers of importance, but 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 299 

Beard was among the early workers and experi- 
menters, and in 1888 the present writer reported 
before the New York Academy of Medicine a 
series of cases treated by hypnotism which, after 
being read, eHcited from the then president of the 
Academy this dubious comphment, " Well, doc- 
tor, you taxed our credulity." The reports of 
all these workers and writers were published en- 
tirely as *' proceedings " of societies, and never 
reached the general public. They were read al- 
most exclusively by physicians and scientists, and 
at first by only a small minority even of them; but 
at present there is a general inquiry for the best 
books and papers on hypnotism, not only by phy- 
sicians, but by the more intelligent part of the pub- 
lic generally, and not from curiosity merely, but 
from a healthy desire to know what is true con- 
cerning a matter of common interest. 

The work done by the men I have mentioned 
and a host of others was most important. First, 
Charcot, with a world-wide reputation as a neu- 
rologist, gave the subject careful study and re- 
ported boldly, and in no uncertain tone, that hyp- 



3O0 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

notism was no fake nor delusion, but a demon- 
strated fact and one worthy of careful considera- 
tion and study. On account of the narrow field 
in which he worked he promulgated some serious 
errors, but while he discovered nothing that was 
not already well known, the influence of his 
name, his scientific reputation, and the confidence 
which the intelligent public had in his judgment 
and honesty, gave hypnotism a standing such as it 
had never before attained. Previous to this 
physicians, and all persons who desired to keep 
unspotted their reputation for scientific ortho- 
doxy, had shared and of course encouraged the 
low estimate of the general public regarding hyp- 
notism. Their knowledge had been gained from 
the same irresponsible sources, and Charcot's re- 
port was a rude shock to their indifference and a 
challenge to their imperfect knowledge of the sub- 
ject. They suddenly woke up to the fact that the 
representations of town-hall " professors," sensa- 
tional novelists, and even the grotesque and scur- 
rilous misrepresentations of the London Lancet 
were not scientific nor true. 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 301 

Then the wider study of Liebeault and Bern- 
heim in general practice and the general hospital 
at Nancy enlarged and corrected the narrower 
views of Charcot, acquired by an exclusive study 
of nervous and hysterical patients, and especially 
emphasised the wonderful power of suggestion. 
By these three well-known men more than by any 
other means the whole broad subject of hyp- 
notism and suggestion w^as placed before the 
medical profession and the scientific world for 
approval or rejection. Approval is not yet gen- 
eral. There is still the man who knows it all 
without having learned anything, there are the 
laggard and the incorrigible conservative; but 
prominent physicians, such as I have mentioned, 
besides a host of others, men of science and people 
of intelligence generally, have become interested 
and desirous of knowing the truth, both as re- 
gards the theories of hypnotism and as regards 
its powers for good or for evil. Capable 
men all over the civilised world — men well 
equipped for scientific investigation — quickly en- 
gaged in seriously studying its problems and ap- 



302 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

plying it to scientific uses in the realm of psy- 
chology and to practical uses in therapeutics. 
The subject was at once raised far above the 
region of either trivialities or superstition, and 
became dignified as a matter of both scientific and 
practical interest. 

In this more dignified and serious work, the 
English Society for Psychical Research with its 
American Branch bore a conspicuous part, and it 
was in the study of that most intricate subject, 
personality, that the relation of hypnotism to 
other well-known mental states became evident. 

From these patiently conducted investigations 
it has been shown that the personality present in 
the hypnotic state is simply the submerged con- 
sciousness which exists in us all and which occa- 
sionally manifests itself in the various interesting 
phenomena more fully described in previous 
chapters. 

It will be observed that, in dealing with the 
hypnotic condition, we are dealing with one which 
is identical with conditions with which we are 
somewhat familiar and which in many persons 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 303 

occur spontaneously. Moreover, the hypnotic 
condition itself often occurs spontaneously or can 
be self-induced at will — the difference being that, 
when induced by a second person or hypnotiser, 
the subject is in communication with his hyp- 
notiser, and when spontaneously or self-induced 
he may be en rapport only with himself. When 
these facts are recognised we begin to get a little 
actual knowledge about hypnotism; we can com- 
pare the hypnotic sleep with other conditions 
concerning which something at least is known, 
namely, the somnambulism of ordinary sleep and 
the condition of double personality. Ordinary 
somnambulism is sufficiently mysterious, but it 
is a condition occurring spontaneously and in 
natural sleep, and it is not brought about by any 
artificial means. It is a condition entered into 
naturally by some persons and not at all by 
others; it is one in which the subconscious mind 
instead of the ordinary conscious mind is domi- 
nant. The moment we understand this and ad- 
mit the existence of this secondary, subconscious 
personality half the mystery concerning all these 



304 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

unusual states, that of hypnotism included, at 
once disappears, for we are at least dealing with 
natural conditions. The hypnotic sleep, also, is 
analogous, if not identical, with ordinary sleep. 
But who can explain the mystery of even ordinary 
natural sleep ? What causes it, and what are the 
conditions, physical and mental, which accompany 
it ? No one can with certainty inform us. It is 
one of those phenomena which are so constantly 
recurring, and which are so familiar to us that we 
almost cease to wonder at them; like the growth 
of a plant, the conception and birth of an infant, 
the rising and setting of the sun, the balancing of 
millions of revolving and swiftly moving suns 
and systems of worlds in limitless space — all these 
wonderful operations of nature, as well as sleep 
and the unconscious action of the mind in sleep, 
are mysterious; but concerning the hypnotic con- 
dition, because there are still unsolved problems 
and unexplained mysteries relating to it, there- 
fore, forsooth, it is unnatural, suspected of evil 
influences, and reckoned as forbidden ground. 
We have seen that hypnotism is a fact, a pov/er; 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 305 

that hundreds of the best minds all over the civil- 
ised world are busy working out its problems, 
solving its mysteries, and learning its uses. This, 
along with the problems of personality, telepathy, 
supernormal perception, psychic action at a dis- 
tance, and other unusual psychic phenomena, was 
the subject which was occupying the attention and 
the intelligently directed efforts of the Society for 
Psychical Research when the late Right Hon. 
William E. Gladstone said of it : '' It is the 
most important work now being done in the 
world — ^by far the most important." This 
was said by one of the largest-brained, best- 
informed, best-balanced, and most inflexibly 
honest men of the century — a man naturally 
conservative and not carried away by new ideas. 
He was an honorary member of the Society, 
along with John Ruskin, Alfred R. Wallace, 
Sir Wm. Crookes, and Lord Tennyson, with 
the late Professor Balfour Stewart, the Right 
Hon. A. J. Balfour, Professor James, Professor 
Langley, Lombroso, Bernheim, and a long list of 
well-known names besides, — English, Continental, 



3o6 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

and American, — as active and corresponding 
members; and these are the men whom the late 
eminently scientific author of Hypnotism, Mes- 
merism, and the Neiv Witchcraft, in an outburst 
of uncontrollable scientific hilarity, characterised 
as " the belated psychical researchers! " 

Hypnotism stands accepted as a power — are its 
works good or are they evil? Of its value as a 
therapeutic agent some slight idea may be formed 
from the preceding chapters, and especially by 
perusal of the work of the men whom I have men- 
tioned. In psychology, as an aid to the study of 
the difficult problems of personality, it is of the 
greatest importance; and yet only a short time 
ago several physicians, some of them of wide 
reputation, allowed such statements as the follow- 
ing to be printed over their signatures, and so to 
be certified to the readers of a widely circulated 
metropolitan newspaper : 

" The effect of hypnotism upon the nerves of 
persons submitting to a hypnotic test is a great 
deal worse than the results of incessant cigarette- 
smoking, and even of the drinking of absinthe." 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 307 

** No person can be placed in a hypnotic condi- 
tion without some harm being done him towards 
wrecking the nerves and shattering his mental 
strength." 

" The exercise of hypnotism upon any person, 
no matter how strong he or she may be, is always 
attended with weakening of the brain cells and 
the nervous system." 

Again one of them declares, " I am convinced 
that, if the bare truth could be generally learned, 
the startling fact would come to light that the in- 
sane asylums contain a great number of inmates 
who would never have reached their portals had 
they not been started on the route by the use of 
hypnotism." 

Now there is a great deal of literature relating 
to the practical use of hypnotism in many lan- 
guages — English, French, German, Swedisfi, 
Italian, and Russian — and by men of well-known 
intelligence, judgment, and integrity. There are 
published proceedings of societies, there have been 
international conventions for the discussion of 
the subject of hypnotism, and yet in all this litera- 



3o8 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

ture and discussion there is no report of injuries, 
either to the mind or the brain cells, such as are 
here portrayed in such gloomy colours, nor any 
hint that such results are likely to follow the use 
of hypnotism properly applied; on the contrary 
many excellent cases are cited where insanity has 
been cured, where the dull mind has been made 
acute and bright, where neurasthenia and melan- 
cholia have been changed to health and happiness, 
and where evil habits and criminal tendencies have 
been removed. As regards the specific statements 
of the physicians above quoted, no case is cited nor 
even referred to as confirming any one of them; 
not one of them is, from the nature of the state- 
ment itself, capable of being demonstrated, and so 
far as truth or demonstration is possible the evi- 
dence all points to exactly an opposite conclusion, 
for all the witnesses who are acquainted with the 
facts testify upon the opposite side. These state- 
ments are simply expressions of deeply biassed 
opinions by persons of very limited acquaintance 
with either the literature or practical uses of hyp- 
notism; and I do not hesitate to say that every 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 309 

person qualified by extensive experience in the 
use of hypnotism, and only such are qualified to 
testify, would pronounce each and every one of 
these statements unqualifiedly false and absolutely 
ridiculous. The time has passed when such 
statements, no matter from what source they ema- 
nate, can pass unchallenged. The hypnotic sleep, 
when properly procured and for a proper pur- 
pose, is, by all who have had large experience in 
its use or observation of its effects, pronounced 
physically and mentally healthful; and by sug- 
gestion its value is vastly augmented. The only 
shadow of excuse for such loose and absurd state- 
ments as those quoted above would be found in 
the temporary dulness which may occur from the 
ignorance of the operator in not properly arous- 
ing the patient from the hypnotic condition after 
treatment — a condition perfectly harmless and 
easily removed. 

In speaking thus positively of the good efifects 
of hypnotism I have reference only to its legiti- 
mate use for proper purposes and by a properly 
constituted and instructed person; its indiscrimi- 



310 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION, 

nate use by ignorant and irresponsible persons is 
always to be deprecated. The self-styled '' pro- 
fessors " who send broadcast their advertising- 
literature, offering to teach all comers the practice 
of hypnotism, and setting forth its advantages 
for amusement, for public or private entertain- 
ment, and for acquiring influence over other per- 
sons to be used for selfish ends, should not only 
be discountenanced and despised, but laws should 
be enacted for their suppression and punishment; 
for in sordid, unskilful, or criminal hands hyp- 
notism may be abused, and like any and every use- 
ful agent may be made use of for evil purposes; 
and those who choose to submit themselves to ex- 
perimentation by such persons do so at their peril. 
While suggestions of an immoral or criminal 
character would be repelled by a mind to which 
such suggestions in the normal state would be ab- 
horrent, still minds of a lower order, minds indif- 
ferent or callous to criminal acts and ideas, but 
which under ordinary circumstances would not 
commit a crime, might in the hypnotic state accept 
and carry out criminal suggestions skilfully pre- 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 311 

sented to them. But actual cases even of that 
character are of the rarest occurrence, and such 
persons would be influenced to commit crime by 
the skilful presentation of motives in their normal 
state — an influence which could be brought to 
bear a hundred or a thousand times where the 
circumstances making hypnotism possible would 
occur but once. 

It is the fashion to speak of any unusual or in 
any way effective influence exerted by one per- 
son over another as a hypnotic influence — or 
rather, if such an influence is for good, it is nat- 
ural and commendable, but, if evil, it is a hypnotic 
influence and of diabolical origin; the foolishness 
of such a judgment, or we might say of such an ig- 
norant prejudice, needs hardly to be pointed out. 

Again, auto-suggestion, or the influence of a 
dominant idea, is often blazoned abroad as a hyp- 
notic influence, and blame is fastened upon some 
unfortunate person absolutely incompetent to 
make use of such an agent, and probably ignorant 
that any such agent as hypnotism exists. As re- 
gards the possible effects of auto-suggestion, if 



3t2 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

stigmatisation or reputed miracle cures can be 
effected by such suggestion, how much easier 
could a mental state be so induced which would 
result in any imaginable eccentricity or even 
crime? Such cases are not uncommon; the mind 
temporarily unbalanced, both the moral quality 
and the effect of the crime are for the moment lost 
sight of under the influence of a stronger domi- 
nant idea, and the person acts under an insane 
impulse, often without even the consciousness or 
memory of the resultant act. It would be well if 
judges and juries, as well as those persons who are 
called to testify as experts in criminal cases, would 
give careful consideration to- such cases. Some- 
times the person committing criminal acts under 
such circumstances is ignorant of the source of 
the impulse, truly believes it to be some external 
influence, and calls it hypnotism. So hypnotism 
is brought into disrepute in respect to matters 
with which it has no possible connection. Witch- 
craft and the Middle-Age epidemic delusions 
would doubtless have been charged to hypnotism, 
had it then been known. 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 313 

Such are some of the crude and unphilosophical 
objections urged by uninstructed persons against 
hypnotism; the objection, however, which is fre- 
quently urged by a more intelligent class of 
critics is of a moral or philosophical character. 
It is wrong, they say, to take such full possession 
of another person's will and so arbitrarily inter- 
fere with his freedom, of choice and action; no 
matter how humane the object or elevated the 
motives, no one is intelligent enough nor good 
enough to assume such a prerogative. 

There has been a vast deal of theological and 
metaphysical juggling relating to the freedom of 
the will, and a vast deal of sentiment expended 
regarding any sort of interference with that free- 
dom ; and yet no one has been able to determine to 
the satisfaction of other equally good thinkers 
exactly what the will is, what is its proper field of 
action, nor how far it is an independently acting 
faculty of the mind at all. Put in its simplest 
terms, we may say that we have certain impulses 
inherited or derived from the senses, and these 
impulses are modified and restrained by a certain 



314 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

wisdom which comes to us from experience and 
development; the resultant of these forces deter- 
mines our choice of action, and the exercise of 
that choice we call the will. Animals act to 
satisfy a want or enjoy a pleasure. We do the 
same thing, only on a higher plane. The will in 
the unintelligent animal is governed by impulse or 
desire alone; the will responds to that impulse 
and does its bidding unhindered. The animal 
feels perfectly free. Its desire and its will 
are in harmony. Its will has no restraint 
except physical inability or external force or ob- 
stacles; but we, looking on from our higher stand- 
point, see that the animal, will and all, is domi- 
nated by inherited proclivities and desires. Let 
intelligence be added; the intelligent dog, who 
has learned something by experience, is set to 
guard his master's dinner; he does not eat it — 
first, because he knows he will be punished if he 
does; or second, perhaps he has an affection for 
his master and wishes to please him. Desire says 
to the dog, " Eat the dinner." Intelligence says, 
*' No; you will be punished if you do/' and he re- 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 315 

frains from eating. The unintelligent dog would 
eat the dinner; desire and will would be in har- 
mony; there would be no restraint. The knowing 
dog would desire to eat the dinner just the same, 
but another element comes in and presents a mo- 
tive not to eat it, namely, faithfulness to his trust, 
affection for his master, or fear of punishment; 
and this dog does not eat it. Something has 
changed; what is it? The desire is not changed, 
it is just as strong as ever, but the choice, the will, 
to eat it is changed — changed by a force stronger 
than desire. The will here is undoubtedly the 
representative of the ego — such as it is^ — of the 
dog; and this ego is free to choose what it will do, 
but it is free to choose only in accordance with the 
strongest motive ; to say otherwise is absurd ; it is 
to deny the whole significance of choice. On 
however high a plane the action may be placed, 
the same contest goes on betw^een impulse and in- 
telligence, desire and wisdom. All our inherited 
tendencies, selfish interests, and habits may array 
themselves on one side, and wisdom, conscience, 
and moral principle on the other; and whichever 



3i6 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

dominates in any particular instance determines 
choice and the consequent action. Man's free 
will consists in choosing what on the whole he 
desires most, or what seems to him best, but what 
that best is for him is determined by the strength 
of his desire, influenced by the degree of his wis- 
dom; and the freedom to choose that which he 
desires is mistaken for absolute freedom, because 
he does not take into account, does not even per- 
ceive, what it is that influences him to choose as he 
does. A man cannot by any will or choice love 
what is disgusting to him; he cannot believe what 
is absurd or lacks evidence; nevertheless, increased 
wisdom may remove the absurdity and furnish the 
evidence which will compel him to believe. Ten- 
nyson voiced common sense, as the true poet gen- 
erally does, when he makes the repentent Guene- 
vere declare. 

We needs must love the highest when we see it ; 
and Paul expresses it vigorously when he ex- 
claims, " I find a law in my members [desire] 
warring against the law of my mind [wisdom] 
and bringing me into captivity." 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 317 

The will is constantly being influenced, whether 
we wish it or no. It is no such settled, immova- 
ble, and unapproachable faculty that it cannot and 
must not be interfered with; on the contrary, it is 
always being influenced by motives which it can- 
not evade. We spend our lives in unconsciously 
influencing each other, and often in honest and 
well-considered attempts to interfere with each 
other's wills. It is the business of the " green- 
goods " man and promoter of schemes, as well as 
the professor of moral philosophy or the exhorter 
at the religious revival meeting. Under the in- 
fluence of powerful motives so skilfully presented 
as for the time being at least to entirely dominate 
the will, ruinous contracts are signed, promises 
made which a cooler judgment shows to be pre- 
posterous, and watches, jewelry, or perhaps the 
last half-dollar are recklessly thrown into the con- 
tribution basket for far-away missions — unwise 
gifts, deeply regretted when wisdom is again en- 
throned ; perhaps, too, the regret may be deepened 
by the cry of want from those needing help who 
^re rnuch nearer home. Tampering with the will 



3i8 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

under such circumstances might with great pro- 
priety be considered as a matter of ethics — or 
even of common honesty. 

There undoubtedly exists a standard of mental 
and moral as well as physical health. It is the 
consensus of the best-informed minds. That 
standard may not be perfect in either case, but it 
is a standard, and it is good. It may be elevated 
as the race progresses, but we must work by it as 
it is to-day. The ideal of education and human 
progress is to bring men as nearly up to that 
standard as possible; and the study of the best 
means of doing this is certainly a worthy study. 
The person who is well born — without hereditary 
vicious or criminal tendencies or ungovernable 
passions — whose opportunities and environments 
have put him in possession of not only knowledge, 
but real wisdom — finds it easy to conform meas- 
urably to this normal standard; but where these 
criminal tendencies and ungovernable passions 
are inherent in the man, and his opportunities and 
environments have given him only a small store 
pf wisdom, the contest between impulse and wis- 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 319 

dom may be fierce — his wisdom may enable him 
to see the good, the moral standard; it may even 
know it is desirable, but his will is dominated by 
the stronger force; the law in his members — his 
hereditary evil tendencies or long-indulged habits 
— are too strong and he fails. Like Paul he may 
cry out, ''Who shall deliver me?'' If Paul's 
remedy is sufficient to change his choice of action 
and the patient will apply it, very well. But like 
the king in " Hamlet " he may 

Try what repentance can — what can it not ? 
Yet what can aught when one cannot repent ? 

Many a man in this emergency, in his best mo- 
ments, seeing the right, but feeling bound both by 
heredity and environment to the wrong, has of 
his own accord sought the help which hypnotic 
suggestion gives, to diminish these evil forces, 
make higher motives predominate, balance the will 
towards the right and give it strength to act ac- 
cording to wisdom— and he has been helped. 
Evil forces have been diminished, the power of 
wisdom increased, and the victory won for the 
right. 



320 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

How is it when the evil tendencies are supreme 
and wisdom has no place and no influence? 
How is it with the incorrigible child in whom 
these tendencies are evident, but where no avail- 
able remedy suffices? His kleptomania, his evil 
habit, or his moral perversity continues, notwith- 
standing every effort to reform him, or to change 
his will ? What do we do with children afflicted 
with physical malformations or deficiencies, hav- 
ing for instance club foot, caries of the spine, or 
other deformities ? We do not delay interference 
until the boy can vote or the girl arrives at an age 
to consent; in that way valuable time would be 
wasted and the result made uncertain or valueless; 
but without regard to the child's will we proceed 
to rectify, to the best of our ability, the abnormal 
condition. So also with the mental or moral de- 
formity; we need not wait on the child's choice 
nor waste sentiment about interfering with his 
will. His will is to do wrong, and there is little 
hope of amendment. He is deficient in the wis- 
dom which would modify and change that will. 
Accordingly such measures are taken — more or 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 321 

less wise — as the parent, guardian, teacher, or the 
state may consider most likely to remedy the evil 
by bringing the patient as nearly as possible up to 
the normal standard; and the parent, guardian, 
teacher, and even the state are beginning to dis- 
cover that hypnotism and suggestion, properly 
and skilfully applied, constitute one of the most 
efficient means which have yet been devised for 
that purpose. 

Of what possible use is the free will of the con- 
firmed dipsomaniac ? He has no power of choice 
except to drink. Put whiskey before him and he 
would drink it, even though he believed the ever- 
lasting torments of hell would be his in conse- 
quence; and yet by hypnotic suggestion the im- 
pulse may be weakened and counteracting motives 
be so introduced that the power to choose absti- 
nence and sobriety would be gained by him ; even 
the passion for drink would be modified or entirely 
dismissed. 

The kleptomaniac steals without motive, simply 
from overwhelming impulse; he has no power of 
choice except to steal; he may not even see the 



322 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

enormity of the act — and yet by suggestion the 
tyranny of impulse is broken, moral perception 
and the power of restraint are developed, and a 
life of honesty and usefulness secured. The same 
is true regarding the victims of many other en- 
slaving vices and criminal impulses, the will to do 
evil is changed to the will to do well, and a moral 
deformity is corrected. 

It is not necessary, nor is it proposed, to inter- 
fere with the normal will, any more than the phy- 
sician or surgeon proposes to interfere with nor- 
mal physical conditions; nor is absolute success 
assured in the treatment of moral deformities by 
suggestion any more than it is assured by proper 
treatment in physical diseases and deformities. 
Fortunately or unfortunately, no such absolute 
power exists ; but any degree of success in these 
desperate cases makes hypnotism stand approved, 
and when, as is the fact, it has shown itself a most 
efficient means of cure, and offers a reasonable 
ground of hope, even in such sad and otherwise 
hopeless cases, it is simply criminal not to make 
use of it. The moralist who under such circum- 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 323 

stances would object, on the ground of tampering 
with the free will of the patient, is quite too sen- 
sitive for comfortable residence in a world where 
such deformities exist and need correction. 

Suppose a father should say, as one actually did 
say, that he would rather his son would go wrong 
of his own free will than right by having that free 
will interfered with by hypnotism. The plea 
seems plausible, but how would he change the con- 
duct of his son except by changing his will — by 
placing motives before him so powerful as tO' com- 
pel a different choice? He interferes with his 
present free will and choice which are wrong and 
evil, so far as he is able to do it, and he would re- 
sort to almost any means to accomplish that end ; 
but the motives which he presents are not suffi- 
cient to overcome the natural impulse to wrong- 
doing, and from a sentiment which is the result 
of ignorance regarding the true nature and office 
of the will and of choice, he refuses to allow ad- 
vantage to be taken of a more receptive condi- 
tion which might be secured, and in which the 
very same motives would be sufficient to turn the 



324 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

scale in favour of right conduct. Supposing these 
motives could be whispered into the ear of his 
son while in ordinary sleep, would he then object? 
That has been successfully accomplished in some 
cases where the hypnotic condition could not be 
secured, and by mothers who have had the intelli- 
gence to use this method of correcting evil tend- 
encies in their children. In natural sleep the 
son is receptive to almost the same degree as in 
hypnotic sleep — the chief difference being that in 
ordinary sleep it is more difficult to get en rapport 
with the sleeper. He is just as defenceless, just 
as unable to protect his precious will to do wrong 
from interference, as in the hypnotic sleep; and 
yet, according to some hair-splitting moralists, the 
one process would be right and the other criminal. 
As regards the comparative danger or safety of 
hypnotic treatment, as compared with many com- 
monly used drugs, there can be no comparison. 
We all know that through the mistakes of physi- 
cians, druggists, nurses, and attendants, danger- 
ous and even fatal effects are sometimes produced 
by such drugs as morphia, aconite, chloral, and 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 325 

chloroform; and we know that asylums abound 
for the treatment of unfortunate victims of alco- 
hol and drug habits. No such accidents occur in 
the therapeutic use of hypnotism and suggestion, 
and no pernicious habit is formed — consequently, 
no asylums are heard of or needed for such pa- 
tients, and no such cases are found in other 
asylums. 

When chloroform was first brought into use 
half a century ago there was the most violent out- 
cry and controversy concerning the right to intro- 
duce an agent capable of being used for such evil 
purposes. All sorts of evil were predicted — 
physical, moral, and religious. There is no doubt 
that it may be and has been used for evil and 
criminal purposes, but its advantages as an anaes- 
thetic are so manifest that it speedily won its way, 
and no one now ever thinks of raising any objec- 
tion to its use on either ethical or religious 
grounds. 

In experimenting with hypnotism for psycho- 
logical purposes, even when in competent hands, 
no suggestion to the performance of criminal acts 



326 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

should ever be made, nor even to acts of a ridicu- 
lous or undignified kind. Town-hall " pro- 
fessors " in time past have been accustomed to 
amuse, and more often to disgust the better por- 
tion of their audiences by such unworthy exhibi- 
tions, and so a most benign and helpful agent has 
been degraded; and I am sorry to say that in a 
few instances even physicians have transgressed 
in this respect and have allowed their zeal in the 
cause of experimentation or clinical instruction 
to outrun their judgment; but instances of such 
practices are rare and are rightly discountenanced. 
But it is objected, " Let it be granted that you 
are able to change the action of the morally de- 
praved, the criminal, and the ill-disposed — it is at 
best only temporary and superficial — something 
foreign, introduced from without and forming no 
part of the real character." The objection cer- 
tainly merits careful examination; but it is based 
upon the supposition, so often implied, that hyp- 
notism supersedes natural law and does its work 
in an unnatural way. No intelligent advocate of 
hypnotism makes or admits any such claim. 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 327 

Changes of the kind here contemplated are the 
direct sequence of natural causes; they are gen- 
erally gradual in effect and educational in char- 
acter, only the educational process is carried on 
under conditions much more favourable for suc- 
cess, making success possible where other methods 
liave constantly failed. Occasionally with a good 
subject, and where a favourable hypnotic condi- 
tion can be secured, a single treatment will break 
up and permanently dismiss a long-continued evil 
habit, but frequently a series of such treatments 
is necessary, separated from each other by gradu- 
ally increasing periods of time, until the new habit 
is confirmed, approved by the normal conscious- 
ness and judgment of the patient, and finally made 
permanent as a real constituent of character. 
The mind works through the brain; but different 
brains differ greatly in form and corresponding 
function. Such differences are congenital, and 
the conformation of the brain must be taken into 
account in any attempted forecast, either of the de- 
gree of success probable or the time needed for the 
change. Given a low-crowned, broad-based head. 



328 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

with the lower portion of the brain through which 
the animal and selfish propensities are manifested 
fully developed, and the upper portion through 
which the higher, moral sentiments are displayed 
dwarfed and rudimentary, and no sudden or easy 
change from selfishness and vice to virtue and 
altruism can be expected. The portion of the 
brain necessary to the exhibition of the higher 
sentiments is small, undeveloped, and inactive; 
nevertheless the organ is present — and the office 
of hypnotic suggestion is to stimulate the moral 
sentiments and that portion of the brain through 
which they are manifested, repress by suggestion 
the lower sentiments, and inhibit the physical 
organ through which these sentiments are dis- 
played. It is a slow, decidedly educational 
process; but if conditions prove favourable, that 
is if the patient can be hypnotised and is sug- 
gestable, by skill and patience on the part of the 
hypnotiser much can be accomplished. On the 
other hand, given a head less broad at the base, 
with a goodly dome, and the region where the 
moral sentiments are expressed fairly developed 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 329 

organically, but dormant and inactive through 
bad education or environment — here a single 
treatment under favourable conditions may suffice 
to change the whole current of feeling and action. 
It is simply turning the current into its natural 
channel, from which by circumstances it had 
been diverted — the proper organs existed and 
only needed stimulating to activity. The same 
thing is true in every educational process. Take 
for instance two children of the same age, neither 
of whom has been instructed in arithmetic. One 
has a natural " faculty " for mathematics — that 
is, he has the brain organisation which makes it 
easy for him to comprehend and remember the re- 
lation of numbers; the other is deficient in that 
respect. The education of one in mathematics will 
be easy — his teacher has only to " tell him once," 
as the saying is, " and he knows it." The educa- 
tion of the other is slow and difficult. If the 
teacher only tells him once and does not repeat 
the lesson, there will be no education in mathe- 
matics. He must be told maiiy times, until the 
mathematical habit is formed, but, when formed, 



330 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

it is a part of his intellectual make-up just as 
much as in the other case. Now it is a fact that 
the mathematical faculty in this dull boy may be 
greatly stimulated by hypnotism and suggestion; 
his mental force and energy are by that means 
directed to the portion of his brain where the 
mathematical faculty is specially manifested; his 
power of concentration is increased and the mathe- 
matical faculty is greatly improved. It is absurd 
to say that, because the particular faculty for 
mathematics was stimulated by suggestion in the 
hypnotic sleep and so the help of the subconscious 
mind secured, therefore the improved faculty 
is only temporary, introduced from without, and 
forms no part of the boy's real intellectual char- 
acter. It is equally absurd to bring the same ob- 
jection to the improvement in the moral character 
of the boy. The two processes are analogous — 
even identical. They are both educational, they 
both need repetition, but both become part and 
parcel of the intellectual and moral nature of the 
boy. 

The facts in a large field of observation corre- 



ETHICS OP HYPNOTISM. 331 

spond to the explanation above given. The cures 
by hypnotic suggestion are just as lasting and 
become just as much a part of character as those 
made by ordinary education and persuasion, or, as 
sometimes happens, under the influence of re- 
ligious excitement; in fact, on a close comparison, 
the advantage would be found greatly in favour 
of suggestion. M. Voisin's case already referred 
to, where " a criminal lunatic, filthy in habits and 
violent in demeanour, and with a life-long history 
of vice and crime " was brought to a condition of 
sanity and to a life of virtue, honesty, and useful- 
ness which was lasting, is an example of what it 
is possible to accomplish by suggestion; and his 
experience is in full accord with that of all who 
have been patient workers in the same field. All 
have found the results obtained by hypnotism 
equally permanent and equally well assimilated, 
as an element in character, as results obtained by 
other methods. 

Another objection to hypnotism on ethical 
grounds is stated as follows : " The great evil of 
hypnotism is that it degrades the level of con- 



332 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

sciousness and makes the man approach the types 
manifested upon lower planes; thus reversing the 
process of evolution, which makes always for 
higher differentiation. And yet," the same 
objector observes, " certain conditions which are 
abnormal can be rectified in the hypnotic state. 
It is curious that it should be so — extremely curi- 
ous." The whole supposed force of this objection 
lies in a false conception of the hypnotic state. 
We have already pointed out the identity of the 
hypnotic condition with the somnambulism of 
ordinary sleep. They are both closely related to 
the activity of the subconscious mind; and to de- 
termine whether hypnotism degrades the level of 
consciousness, it must be determined whether the 
activity displayed by the subconscious mind is on 
a lower level than the activity of the ordinary 
conscious mind. This is not the place for any 
extended discussion of the function of the sub- 
conscious mind — that has already been pointed 
out in a former chapter ; suffice it to say here that 
its action, according to good authorities, is closely 
allied to the best productions in poetry, muaic, 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM. 333 

art, and architecture — in short, that inspiration 
and genius have their springs in the subconscious 
mind, while logical, inductive reasoning is more 
especially the offspring of the conscious intellect. 
To those who are accustomed to look upon the in- 
tellect as the only part of man's psychic constitu- 
tion which is worth considering, as has been much 
the fashion in the past, this classification of the 
faculties at first glance may not seem justified, 
but the relation of the subconscious mind to the 
broad subject of mental and psychic activity is 
one only recently brought fully to light; it is, how- 
ever, a subject which is at present claiming the 
attention of psychologists, and will in my judg- 
ment claim still wider attention in the future. 
The ofiice of hypnotism in its highest use is to 
bring this subconscious mind into activity and 
the exercise of its highest function. It is not 
always accessible, it is not always of a high order 
when reached, nor does it always impress itself 
upon the conscious mind for expression; but 
sometimes all these conditions occur, and through 
the high perceptive faculties of this more recently 



334 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

differentiated part of the psychic consciousness — 
measurably freed from the prejudices and en- 
tanglement of our limited physical and intellectual 
life — the soul in some manner comes into intelli- 
gent relationship with physical, mental, or 
spiritual truth with a clearness and certainty such 
as it never otherwise experiences. Hypnotism, 
instead of lowering the plane of consciousness, ele- 
vates it; usually, perhaps always, to some degree, 
and in exceptional cases to a degree that is indeed 
marvellous. It is for this reason that the hyp- 
notic sleep when properly induced, alone, without 
suggestion or interference of any kind, is so often 
productive of physical health and mental and 
moral improvement. It is indeed " curious " that 
an agent which degrades the plane of conscious- 
ness should be able to rectify abnormal conditions, 
moralas well as physical, and elevate the whole 
physical and psychic character of the man. It is 
a mistake — the grade of consciousness is not low- 
ered, but elevated, by hypnotism. 

The ethical status of hypnotism and sugges- 
tion, then, is not different from and certainly hot 



ETHICS OF HYPNOTISM 335 

inferior to that of any other efficient means of 
curing disease or rectifying abnormal conditions. 
The moral nature has its deviations from the nor- 
mal just as wide and fully as important as has 
the physical or intellectual nature, and we have 
the same right to interfere with it in accordance 
with the dictates of science and humanity. The 
agency through which we accomplish this desir- 
able change, we find not only safe and free from 
evil results, but healthful and elevating in itself 
and in its proper use, physically, mentally, 
morally, and spiritually. Instead of " the passing 
of hypnotism," signs of which some timid and 
ultra-conservative physicians have been endeav- 
ouring to discover, it is like the dawning of a new 
day, a light growing brighter and brighter even to 
its culmination. Its uses and its ethics are under- 
going the closest scrutiny, and they are both thriv- 
ing under the ordeal; prejudice is being dispelled 
by enlightenment; intelligent, active workers 
among reputable and eminent physicians are being 
added to the number of its adherents; and when 
it is cleansed from the soil of detraction with 



336 HYPNOTISM AND SUGGESTION. 

which ignorant calumniators have befouled it, and 
it is still further polished and made beautiful by 
the attrition of science, it will become a chief cor- 
ner-stone in the future imposing edifice, The 
Newer Therapeutics. 



INDEX. 



A. 

PAGE 

A., Miss, Case treated by Hypnotism and Suggestion 113 
A., Mrs., Case ; unfavorable puerperal condition 

treated 121 

Anschutz, Gustave, Represents the Odic light by 

painting. Plate 255 

Animal Magnetism, Its singular career 27 

Arabians, Their influence upon medicine 17 

Atacama, The, Shipwreck of, seen in a dream by the 

captain's daughter 72 

Averroes, His theories , 17, 20 



B. 

Badaire, M., Case of Somnambulism reported by 54 

Berillon, Dr., On Hypnotic Suggestion applied to the 

education of children 140 

Bernheim, Emphasises the uses of Suggestion 28, 30 

Blushing, Case treated 114 

Bordeaux, Archbishop of. His case of Somnambulism 

reported 53 

Bourne, Ansel, His two personalities 51, 52, 58 

Bramwell, Dr., On appreciation of time by Somnam- 

bules 144 

Bright, His contribution to medical science 14 

Bronte-phobia, Case treated iii 

Brown, A. J,, the second personality of Ansel Bourne 

produced by Hypnotism 58 

337 



338 INDEX. 

C. 

PAGE 

C, Mrs., Case of Melancholia treated by Hypnotism. io8 
Charcot, His influence in introducing Hypnotism, 28, 29, 299 
Christian Science, and Metaphysical Healing. . . 19, 20, 33 

" " Its cures 37 

Its fallacies 34 

Cigarette Habit, Case treated 156 

Cosmogony, Biblical, Reaction of early science 

against 5 

Constipation, Case treated 113 

Cowardice, Case treated 153 

Cuvier and Lyell, Discoveries by 5 



Darwin and Wallace, Discoveries by 6 

Deity, Reduced to a statement of force and law 6 

Dominant Ideas, Case treated 159 

Dreams, Veridical, Case reported 72 

Dufay, Dr., Cases of hypnotising at a distance by. . . 233 



Education, Its object and ideal 318 

•' Difficulty of overcoming hereditary vi- 
cious tendencies in 318 

• ' Value of Hypnotism in 322 

" Suggestion in ordinary sleep useful in. . . 324 

Educational uses of Hypnotism and Suggestion. 

Cases 124,126,149 

Endlicher, Prof., Odic flame seen from magnets, 

crystals, etc 254 

Epilepsy, Cases treated 207, 211 

Esdaile, His experiments with ' ' Magnetized " Water 228 
" Hypnotises a blind man at a distance 230 

Ethics of Hypnotism 176, 309, 313, 325 

F. 

Force, Psychic, The basis of the newer thought in 

Therapeutics 10 



INDEX. 339 
G. 

PAGE 

Galen, His place in the development of Medical Sci- 
ence 14 

Genius, The work of 47 

' ' Its genesis and development 90 

H. 

H., Mrs., Case, Influence of Hypnotism and Sugges- 
tion on lactation 117 

Harvey, His contribution to Medical Science 14 

Hahnemann, His theories ; 18 

Hallucination of Persecution, Case treated 162 

Hallucinations, Produced in the Hypnotic State by 

mental suggestion 238 

Healy, Ira, Hypnotic Trance, Clairvoyance 77 

Heidenhain, His theory of Inhibition 65 

Hippocrates, His position and method in Medical 

Science 13 

Homoeopathy, Its Contribution to Scientific Medicine 24 

Houdin, Robert, His testimony for Clairvoyance 83 

Hughlings- Jackson, His theory of different "levels " 

in the Cerebro-spinal system 66 

Hypnotism, Authorities in 29 

" Cases treated by, without suggestion 195 

** Value of Charcot's work in 29, 299 

*' Different estimates of its nature and 

value 103 

" Sources of Prejudice against 294 

•* Unjust representations of, in current lit- 
erature 296 

** Its true representatives 298 

** Educational uses of, 126, 133, 149, 151, 174, 187 

" Work of the S. P. R. in relation to 302 

*• Adverse opinions — their claims to consid- 
eration 306, 307 

** Moral and Philosophical objections 

313, 326, 334 

'• Its safety compared with drugs 324 



340 INDEX. 

PAGE 

Hypnotism, Case of Vice, Crime, and Insanity treated 

by 138 

*' Its use as an agent in reform 126, 138, 320 

'* Its ethics 176,309,313,336 

•* Reform by 32, 148, 175, 188 

Hypnotisation, At a distance. 231 

Hypnotisers, Responsibility of 189, 309, 325 

I. 

Inebriety, Case treated 124 

" Forms of Suggestion useful in the differ- 
ent stages of 179, 183, 191 

'• Auto-Suggestion in 184 

' ' Suggestion of Higher Ideals in 190 

India, Phases of Psychic Phenomena in 265 

Indians, North American, Psychic Phenomena 

among 272 

Inhibition, Theory of 65 

Intellect, Heightened activity of, in Somnambulism 

and the Hypnotic condition 68 

" The corrective influence of 37 

J- 

Jacollicot, His book, Occult Science in India 265 

Janicaud, His Somnambulism and Clairvoyance 54 

Jenner, His contribution to Medical Science 15 

K. 

Kepler, Discoveries by 5 

Krafft-Ebing, His case of lima S 61, 63, 95, 97 



Lactation, Influence of Hypnotism on 117 

Laennec, His contribution to Medical Science 14 

Long, Commodore, Sees Ira Healy 81 

M. 

M. M., Case, Hysterio-Catalepsy, Double Personality 198 

M. v., Disobedient and unmanageable boy, treated.. 126 



INDEX. 341 

PAGE 

Magnetism, " Animal," A recognisable influence im- 
parted to inanimate objects by 227 

•* Esdaile's experiments in 228 

Matter and Spirit 45, 276 

McDowell, His contribution to Medical Science 14 

Medicine, Scientific, Contributors to it . . 13 

Melancholia, Cases treated 108, 159 

Mesmer, His place in the development of Thera- 

apeutics 18, 24, 27 

Methods in Science — Objective and Subjective. 2 

Mind, Its influence on physiological processes 31 

The Sub-conscious, Its importance in solving 

psychological problems. 47 
** *' Conditions under which it 

has been observed 85 

♦* " '* Theories of its develop- 
ment 89 

" " Medico-legal aspect of . . . 96 
'• *• Knowledge of, important 

to the Hypnotiser loi 

N. 

Nature, Its two principles 45, 276 

Newton, Discoveries by 5 

Night-terror, Case treated. , 154 

O. 

Odic Light, Reichenbach's experiments 249 

P. 

Pain, Control of by Hypnotism 123 

Paracelsus, His doctrines 17, 18, 19, 20, 24 

Paur, Miss Sophie, Sees the Odic flame 252-253 

Personality, Double, Examples of 50 

" Development of 87 

Prince, Dr. Morton, On different " levels " in the Cere- 

bro-Spinal System 65 



342 INDEX. 

PAGE 

Prince, Dr. Morton, On Objections to his theory of 

Inhibition — Illustrations 68 

Psychical Research, The English Society for 302 

Psychometry 258, 264 

" Denton's book, The Soul of Things 259 

" Destruction of Pompeii described by. . 260 

R- 

R. , Marceline, Case of Double Personality by Hypno- 
tism 60 

R., Miss, Case, Excessive blushing treated 114 

" Rapport, " Its relation to the subtle forces in nature 214 

" Cases illustrating it, by the S. P. R 

219. 222, 227 

*' Case illustrating it, by Mr. Kegan Paul. 221 
•* Methods in which it is exhibited in the 

Hypnotic condition 239 

*• Class of persons who deny it 242 

** Why it is accepted by many 243 

** Explanation of by Wave or Vibratory 

theory 273 

" Explanation of, by Personal Emanation. 279 
*' Explanation of, by the Theory of the ac- 
tion of the Sub-conscious Mind. .286, 2S7, 290 
" Theories regarding its nature and phe- 
nomena 241 

Reform, Effected by Hypnotism 32, 148, 175, 188 

Reichenbach, Experiments with Sensitives 249 

Religion, Enlarged conceptions of 4 

Ribot, His theory of Personality 87 

Rheumatism, Case treated 209 

S. 

Science, Western, Early rebels against Biblical Cos- 
mogony 5 

" Indebtedness of Medicine to it 14, 22 

*' Its attitude toward Hypnotism and Sug- 
gestive Methods 1,21, 102 



INDEX. 343 

PAGE 

Sentiment of mankind opposed to gross Materialism . 7 
Self, The Subliminal, See Mind, Sub-conscious— and 44 

Sexual Perversity, Cases treated 156, 157 

Sims, His contribution to Medical Science 14 

Sleep, Deep Hypnotic, not necessary to effective Sug- 
gestion 142 

Smith, Mr. G. A., Operator with Wells in cases illus- 
trating Rapport 218 

Society for Psychical Research, English, Its work 

with reference to 

Hypnotism 302 

'* •* *• *• Mr. Gladstone's 

opinion of its 

work 305 

'• *' " ** The men interest- 
ed in it 305 

Somnambulism, Representing a Second Personality.. 53 

Stage-fright, Case treated 160 

Stokes, His contribution to Medical Science. . . , 14 

Suggestion, Its influence on Physiological Proc- 
esses 31, 113, 137, 182 

" Hypnotic, in the education and reform 

of children 140 

** A dominant factor in Newer Therapeu- 
tics 43 

*• In ordinary sleep 324 

T. 

T., Miss, Case, Effect of Hypnotism on the Vaso- 

Motor System 119 

Therapeutics, Psychic element in i, 10, 18-22, 24-34, 4i 

" Development of, in history 11 

Tyndall, " Potency and Promise " in Matter itself. . . 7 
" Importance of his announcement in relation 

to Psychic Therapeutics 41 

V. 

v., Miss, Stage-fright, case treated , 160 

Van Helmont, Revives the Archus of Paracelsus. ... 18 



344 INDEX, 

PAGE 

Vaso-Motor System, Influence of Hypnotism Upon, 114, 119 
Versalius, His position in the development of Medi- 
cal Science 14 

Voisin, M. Auguste, His case of Vice, Crime, and In- 
sanity treated by Hypnotism 138 

W. 

Water, " Magnetised," Detection of, by Sensitives. . 

205, 7, 228 

Will, Its Freedom Considered 313 

Willan, His contribution to Medical Science. 14 

Wundt, His attitude toward unusual Psychic Phe- 
nomena 64 

X. 

X. , Fileda, Her two Personalities 50 

X., Mrs., Case, Hallucination of Persecution, treated. 162 

Y. 

Yogi, Indian, Qualifications 266 

" Their remarkable performances 267 

Z. 

Z,, Alma, Different Personalities 52 

Zoist, Case of Hypnotising at a distance reported in. . 231 



LEJL76 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Nov. 2004 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724) 779-21 1 1 



